JP2020120785A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance an amusement of a game being different from a variable display game.SOLUTION: A game machine executes a variable display game (special pattern variable display game) on the basis of establishment of a prescribed condition, and can generate a special game state when a result of the variable display game becomes a special result. The game machine comprises: specific game execution means (performance control device 300) capable of executing a specific game (for example, a Roulette performance) different from the variable display game; and setting means (game control device 100) capable of setting one probability set value out of a plurality of probability set values to which a probability value used for lottery of the variable display game is allocated respectively. In the game machine, according to a result mode of the specific game, a probability set value (probability set value which is being set currently) set by the setting means can be suggested.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 95

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a variable display game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state when the result of the variable display game is a special result.

Conventionally, as a game machine, a game machine capable of executing a game state notification game in a special game state after the result of the variable display game has been a big hit, as a game different from the variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed. Are known. The game state notification game is composed of a card game or the like, and the result of the game state notification game can notify the content of the specific game state after the special game state ends (transition to a time saving state and the number of time saving). (For example, Patent Document 1
reference).

JP, 2012-110595, A

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the interest of the game different from the variable display game cannot be sufficiently enhanced.
An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game different from the variable display game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1 is
In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state when a variable display game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the variable display game is a special result,
Specific game executing means for executing a specific game different from the variable display game,
A setting means capable of setting one probability setting value from a plurality of probability setting values to which a probability value used for the lottery of the variable display game is assigned;
The probability setting value set by the setting means can be suggested according to the result mode of the specific game.

According to the present invention, the interest of a game different from the variable display game can be increased.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of the gaming machine. It is a flow chart explaining main processing. It is a flow chart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flow chart explaining output processing. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. It is a flow chart explaining winning a prize switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining probability setting value change processing. It is a flow chart explaining probability set value confirmation processing. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure game process. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining hard random number acquisition processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special process starting port switch common processing. It is a flow chart explaining special figure reservation information judgment processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure normal process. (A) is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 fluctuation start process, (b) is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure fluctuation process. It is a flow chart explaining processing during special figure display. It is a flow chart explaining processing during special figure display. It is a flowchart for explaining the universal figure game process. It is a flow chart explaining ordinary processing usually. It is a flow chart explaining processing during general figure change. It is a flow chart explaining processing during public figure display. It is a flow chart explaining processing during ordinary drawing. It is a flow chart explaining external information edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining external information edit processing. It is the flowchart which explains the main processing in the production control control equipment. It is a flow chart explaining reception command check processing. It is a flow chart explaining received command analysis processing. It is a figure explaining another example of setting of a probability set value. It is a flow chart explaining the main processing in the 1st modification. It is a flow chart explaining probability setting value change processing in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the fixed condition monitoring process in a 2nd modification. It is a flow chart explaining the main processing in the 3rd modification. It is a flow chart explaining shift judgment processing in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the state of the switch corresponding to the probability set value in the 4th modification. It is a flow chart explaining probability setting value change processing in the 4th modification. It is a figure explaining a schematic structure of a setting means and a game control device in the 5th modification. It is a flow chart explaining probability set value confirmation processing in the 6th modification. It is a flow chart explaining the main processing in the 7th modification. It is a flow chart explaining the probability set value change processing in the 7th modification. It is a flow chart explaining the probability set value change processing in the 8th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value confirmation process in a 9th modification. It is a flow chart explaining the probability set value confirmation processing in the 10th modification. It is a figure explaining the alerting|reporting aspect in an 11th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of suggestive production. It is a figure explaining an example of suggestive production. It is a figure explaining an example of suggestive production. It is a figure explaining an example of suggestive production. It is a figure explaining an example of suggestive production. It is a figure explaining an example of suggestive production. It is a figure explaining the modification of suggestive production. It is a figure explaining the modification A of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification A of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification A of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification A of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification A of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification A of a game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of the game board. It is the flowchart which explains the deformation example of the main processing in the production control control equipment. It is a flowchart explaining an assist symbol control process. It is a flow chart explaining variable system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining variation production setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining effect substitution processing. It is a figure explaining the modification B of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification B of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification C of the game board. It is a figure explaining the modification C of the game board. It is a flow chart explaining replay control processing. It is a flow chart explaining a look-ahead symbol system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining look-ahead variable system command processing. It is a figure explaining the 1st example of a game ball pre-reading production. It is a figure explaining the 2nd example of a game ball pre-reading production. It is a figure explaining the 3rd example of a game ball pre-reading production. It is a figure explaining a game ball storage device. It is a figure explaining a starting winning unit. It is a figure explaining a starting winning unit. It is a figure explaining the modification of an out zone unit. It is a figure explaining the modification of an out zone unit. It is a diagram illustrating an example of a game triggered by the pseudo winning. It is a diagram illustrating an example of a game triggered by the pseudo winning.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is attached to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. In addition, on the front frame (main body frame) 12, the game board 3
A glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of 0 is attached.

Further, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built in, and decorations and effects, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, an abnormality notification color of the lamp, LED, etc. (for example, red). The frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) and the speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is provided below the front frame 12 as well. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b notify the contents of the abnormality by voice. It should be noted that a lamp for notifying the dispensing abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (for supplying game balls to a hitting ball launching device (not shown)
Reservoir plate), the upper bowl ball outlet 22 from which the gaming balls dispensed from the dispensing unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 flow out, and the gaming balls dispensed in a state where the upper dish 21 is full. A lower tray (reception tray) 23 for storing and an operation handle 24 of the ball-striking launcher are provided. Further, on the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21, there is provided an effect button 25 having an effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.
Although the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25 in the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 may be provided separately from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device may be provided near the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Further, to the right of the effect button 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. Balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card
Etc. are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player turns the operation handle 24 to cause the ball launching device to direct the gaming balls supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. Fire. Further, by the player operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), the effect of the player's operation intervening is displayed. It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.

On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is a resin side case 3 provided at each of four corners of the game board 30.
3 and the guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a center case (game production structure) 40 having a display device 41 in the substantially center is arranged. Display device 41
Is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and prevent the game ball from jumping in from the peripheral game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). In the area where the image on the display screen can be displayed (display area), a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols), information relating to the game such as a character that directs the special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the effect are displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is played. Further, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) for effect based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen.
Further, on the left part and the right part of the center case 40, a board effect device 44 is provided, which is a movable effect device for effecting a game including a special figure variation display game by operating movable effect members. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

Further, in the lower left part of the center case 40, a sub-display for displaying a fourth symbol for executing the decorative special figure variable display game separately from the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device 41 and for displaying the number of starting memories An information display device 90 is provided.

The sub-information display device 90 is a first light emitting unit that forms a sub-game display unit that displays a fourth symbol that executes the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the first special figure variation display game. The second sub configured by the sub game display unit 91 and a single light emitting unit that forms a sub game display unit that displays the fourth symbol that executes the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the second special figure variable display game. And a game display unit 92. Furthermore, the first special display variable display game which is the right to execute the first special figure variable display game by the two light emitting units, and the second special figure variable display game which is the two light emitting units are executed. A second sub-display section 94 showing the number of second starting memories, which is the right to perform.

In the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92, a display indicating that the corresponding special figure variable display game is being variably displayed and a display indicating the result are turned off, blinking, and lit of the light emitting unit. Can be displayed. Further, the first sub-display unit 93 and the second sub-display unit 94 indicate the numbers of the first starting memory (special figure 1 hold) and the second starting memory (special figure 2 hold), respectively, to turn off the two light emitting parts, It can be displayed by blinking and lighting.

By providing the sub information display device 90 separately from the display device 41, the fourth symbol is displayed on the display device 4
By displaying the data in No. 1, it is possible to effectively utilize the display area without occupying the display area of the display device 41. The sub information display device 90 is provided outside the operation range of the board production device 44 so that the sub information display device 90 is not covered in the process of operating the board production device 44. ..

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal symbol starting gate 34 (general figure starting gate, starting area, inflow area) for giving a starting condition of the figure varying display game. The game ball that won the universal figure starting gate 34 is a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).
Detected by.
On the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, three general winning openings 3
5 is arranged, one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the universal figure starting gate 34. The game balls that have won the general winning openings 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting area, inflow area) for providing a starting condition of the first special figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, directly below the starting winning opening 36, a normal variation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting area, inflow area) for providing a start condition of the second special figure variation display game is provided.
The normal variation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow into the movable member 37b by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side.
It normally holds a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which the game ball cannot flow. Then, when the result of the universal figure variation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the universal electric prize solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a drive device is used to open the game ball easily into the regular variation winning device 37. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). It should be noted that the normal variable winning device 37 may be allowed to win even in the closed state, and in the closed state, the player may win the prize rather than the open state.
Further, below the normal variation winning device 37, an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize is provided.

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32 and on the right side of the starting winning opening 36, a special variation that can be converted into a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A winning device (large winning opening) 38 is arranged.
The special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening/closing door 38c that can be opened by pivoting the upper end side in the direction of falling toward the front side, depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. From the state where the special winning opening is closed (the blocking state which is disadvantageous to the player) to the open state (
It is converted to a state advantageous to the player). That is, the special variation winning device 38, for example,
Open/close door 38c driven by a special winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device
Equipped with a special winning opening that can be opened and closed by a special winning state or a small hitting game state, by converting the big winning opening from the closed state to the open state, it is easy for the game balls to flow into the big winning opening. Then, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. A special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is arranged inside the special winning opening (winning area) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. .. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two special winning opening switches 38a are provided, and the game ball that has flowed into the special winning opening is detected by any of the special winning opening switches 38a. By thus providing a plurality of special winning opening switches 38a, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball that has flowed into the special winning opening.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game area 32 in which the game balls flow down, the area on the left side of the center case 40 is the left side game area and the area on the right side of the center case 40 is the right side game area. ing. Then, the player can aim the winning at the starting winning opening 36 by adjusting the launching force to shoot the game ball to the left game area (so-called left hit), and shoot the game ball to the right game area (so-called). By hitting the right side, the universal figure starting gate 34 and the normal variation winning device 3
It is possible to aim for a prize to be paid to the No. 7 or the special variable winning device 38.
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is arranged at a position corresponding to the right game area, and is fired to the right game area. The played game sphere is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. Since the material of at least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is a material that allows the game spheres passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside, the player etc. A game ball that passes through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball that flows down the right-side game area) can be visually recognized from the front of the flow path forming member 42 through the flow path forming member 42. ..

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure changing display game, the second special figure changing display game, and the general figure starting gate 34, which are special figure changing display games, are displayed. There is provided a collective display device 50 for displaying a general-purpose variable display game which is triggered by winning and various information.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure variation display unit (special figure 1 indicator) 51 and a second special figure for a first special figure variation display game including a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. The second special figure fluctuation display section (special figure 2 display) 52 for the variable display game, the fluctuation display section (general figure display) 53 for the general figure variable display game composed of LED lamps, and the same LED lamp And a storage display unit 54, 55, 56 for informing the number of starting memories of each variable display game.
In addition, the collective display device 50, a first gaming state display unit (first gaming state display unit, right-handed informing unit) 57, which informs that a right-handed game is more advantageous than a left-handed game, a time saving When a state occurs, a second gaming state display section (second gaming state indicator, time saving state informing section) 58 that lights up to inform the occurrence of a time saving state, a probability state of big hit when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on is a high probability state. A third game state display section (third game state display unit, probability state display section) 59 for displaying that
Round display unit 6 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing the special variation winning device 38)
0 is provided.
Note that the collective display device 50 may be further provided with a display unit (display device) or the like that lights up when a big hit occurs and notifies the occurrence of the big hit.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 is displayed at the center while the variation display game is being executed, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being executed on the display device 41. The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to 100 msec, for example. In addition, in the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also driven to blink to change. It is configured to display that it is inside.
When the result of the game is “out”, for example, the central segment is turned on as a result mode of the off, and when the result of the game is “hit”, the off result mode (special result mode) is off. A game result is displayed by turning on a result mode (for example, numbers or symbols) other than the result mode.

The public figure display 53 blinks a lamp during the change to display that the change is occurring, and after a predetermined time, displays the game result as a lighting mode or a lighting color according to the result of the game. In addition, the universal figure holding indicator 56 displays the number of starting memories (=holding number) of the universal figure starting gate 34, which is a fluctuation start condition of the universal figure indicator 53, by turning off, blinking, and lighting a plurality of LEDs. Special Figure 1 Hold indicator 54
Is the number of unexploited balls (starting memory number=holding number) out of the number of winning balls into the starting winning port 36, which is the condition for starting variation of the special map 1 display 51, by turning off, blinking, and turning on a plurality of LEDs. indicate. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55, the start memory number (=holding number) of the second starting winning opening (ordinary variation winning device 37), which is the variation start condition of the special figure 2 indicator 52, turns off a plurality of LEDs. Display by blinking or lighting.

The first gaming state display unit (right-handling notification unit) 57 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and turns off the lamp when the gaming state is more advantageous to the player when left-handed than right-handed (normally). When the player is in a game state in which the right hitting is more advantageous than the left hitting for the player (right hitting), the lamp is turned on.

The second gaming state display unit (time saving state notification unit) 58 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and in the normal gaming state in which the time saving state does not occur (when the variable time reduction function is not activated), the lamp is turned off. If the time saving condition occurs (when the fluctuation time shortening function is activated), turn on the lamp.

The third gaming state display section (probability state display section) 59 is composed of an LED lamp and the like, and the gaming machine 1
When the probability state of the big hit is low when the power of 0 is turned on (normal probability state), the lamp is turned off, and when the probability state of the big hit is high probability state (probability change state) Turns the lamp on.

The round display unit 60 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, when the special game state is not in effect, the lamp is turned off, and in the special game state, a lamp corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result is displayed. Turn it on. The round display section may be configured by a 7-segment type display.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls a game in an integrated manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It includes a CPU unit 110 having the same, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU section 110 is a game microcomputer (called an amusement chip (IC)).
CPU) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that generates a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock of a random number generation circuit. DC32V, DC12V, D generated by the power supply device 400 are provided in the game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level such as C5V is supplied to enable the operation.

The power supply device 400 is an AC- that generates a DC voltage of 32V DC from an AC power supply of 24V.
A normal power supply unit 410 having a DC converter or a DC-DC converter for generating a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from a DC32V voltage, and a RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 are supplied with a power supply voltage during a power failure. Backup power supply unit 420 to supply
The control signal generator 430 has a power failure monitoring circuit, and generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal for notifying the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply part 420 and the control signal generation part 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, the main. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, the cost can be reduced by removing it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power source is the game microcomputer 11 of the game control device 100.
1 (in particular, the built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a backup storage means capable of holding the stored data even when the power is off. When the power is restored, the control can be restarted based on the data held by the backup storage means. The control signal generation unit 430, for example, monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects a power failure occurrence when the voltage drops to, for example, 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Further, even when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point. The power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, Read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B and RA that can be read and written at any time
An M (random access memory) 111C is provided.

The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area of various signals and random number values during game control. Used as. ROM111B or RAM11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the fluctuation pattern by referring to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as starting memory. Further, the variation pattern table includes a deviation variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, there are tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after reaching the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), the variation before reaching the reach state. A table (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half variation pattern that is a pattern is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. A game state in which the game state is advantageous to the player when it becomes a special result mode (special game state)
In the gaming machine 10 that becomes, at the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not been derived and displayed yet,
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. Then, for example, the state in which the variable display is performed by the plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result forms are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfying the condition satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variable display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the result mode is displayed by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the variable display area on the left and right, the condition that satisfies the special result mode (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, at the time when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two variable display areas of the left, the middle, and the right (for example, the same Status that has become identification information,
However, the special result mode may be excluded), and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this reach state.

Then, the reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the normal effect (N reach), the special 1 reach (SP1 reach), as the reach effects in which the possibility of deriving the special result mode is different (expected value is different), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and Premier reach are set. The expected value is no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <
It has become higher in order of premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in at least the variable display mode when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of sync). Therefore, the state in which the reach state is generated is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit, as compared with the case where the reach state is not generated.

The CPU 111A executes the game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. Control of the whole 10 is performed. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the symbol of the big hit, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (
Random pattern generation to generate a random pattern for determining the reach of various reach or variation display games without reach, etc.) And a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

Further, the CPU 111A executes the ROM 111B in the processing related to the special figure variation display game.
One of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111A causes the game result (hit (
(Big hit or small hit) or out), probability state of the special figure variation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), operation state of the normal variation winning device 37 as the current game state (time saving) Based on the operation state), the number of starting memories, etc., one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Where the CPU
111A constitutes a fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure fluctuation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of a payout unit according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to win a prize ball. Control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

In the input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111, a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a start opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, It is connected to the gate switch 34a in the universal starting gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a of the special variation winning device 38, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is negative such as 7V. An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 that receives a logic signal and converts it into a 0V-5V positive logic signal is provided. Since the input range of the proximity I/F 121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or the proximity switch is illegally short-circuited, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut to float. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the occurrence of, and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The proximity I/F1
Among the outputs of 21, the detection signals of the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a are input to the second input port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124.

Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, or a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 is detected. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 and the like are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

Furthermore, the third input port 124 is a set value change function that serves as a detection unit that detects an operation in the operation unit for selecting from a plurality of probability set values to which a probability value that gives a special result in the special figure variation display game is assigned. Signals from the switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 are input.

The setting key switch 152 detects the operation of the setting key operation unit that is the first operation unit of the operation units. The setting key operation unit is provided with a keyhole into which the setting key is inserted, and is configured so that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. .. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor capable of detecting that it has been turned to the second position, and it is turned on when it is turned to the second position and is not turned to the second position. If there is, it is turned off.

The set value change switch 151 detects an operation of a set value change button that is a second operation unit of the operation units. The set value change button is a push-type button, and the set value change switch 151 is turned on when the set value change button is pressed,
If it is not pressed, it is turned off.

By operating these operation parts, you can select the probability setting value to which the probability value that will be a special result in the special figure variation display game is assigned, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value can be played in the game. It is being used. Here, six probability setting values, setting 1 to setting 6, are prepared. The probability value assigned to each probability setting value is 1/320 in setting 1, 1/310 in setting 2, 1/300 in setting 3, 1/290 in setting 4, 1/28 in setting 5.
The value is 0 and 1/270 in setting 6. This probability value is the probability value in the normal probability state,
The probability value in the high probability state is 10 times the probability value in the normal probability state.

When selecting the probability setting value, first, the front frame 12 is opened, and the probability setting value is set by turning on the power of the gaming machine with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position. The probability setting value can be changed, and the probability setting value can be changed by pressing the setting value change button in this probability setting value changing state. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153.

In addition, when the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operating unit turned to the second position with the front frame 12 closed, or when the setting key of the setting key operating unit is turned on after turning on the power of the gaming machine. When turned to the second position, the currently selected probability setting value is the probability setting value display device 153.
The probability setting value confirmation mode is displayed, but the probability setting value cannot be changed.

The probability setting value display device 153 is a 7-segment type display, and the probability setting value is
It is designed to display with the number 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode can be used as long as the probability setting value can be recognized. Further, other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or the probability setting value may be indicated by the lighting mode or emission color of one or more LEDs. Further, the probability setting value display device 153 may not be provided, and the probability setting value information may be displayed using the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and accessory ratio.
In this case, while operating the probability setting value (probability setting value change state, probability setting value confirmation mode, etc.), the probability setting value information is displayed, and otherwise the calculated base value and character ratio Give priority to the display.

In the present embodiment, the setting value change button, the setting key operation unit, and the probability setting value display device 15
3, etc. are provided in the game control device 100, and the game control device 100 selects a probability set value to which a probability value used for lottery of the special figure variation display game is assigned from a plurality of types of probability set values by operating the operation unit. It is supposed to be a setting means that enables it. The function of this setting means may be provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100. That is, you may make it provide a setting means separately from the game control apparatus 100. In this case, the operation signals of the set value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 may be input to the game control device 100 to change the probability set value in the game control device 100, or on the setting sub-board side. The probability setting value is changed and determined based on the operation of the setting value change switch 151 or the setting key switch 152,
The determination result may be transmitted to the game control device 100.

Of the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is the main board 10
It is also designed to be supplied from 0 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70.
Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37
The detection signal of a is configured to be input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation. Has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is the enable signal CE when the gaming microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the second input port 123.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, to the input unit 120, a frame radio wave incorrect signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on a radio wave detected by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be accepted), a payout abnormality status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (Signal output when detecting that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full)), touch switch signal (input to the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24) Based signal), an out ball detection switch signal (a signal based on detection by an out switch that detects all the game balls that have been shot in the game area 32 and finished playing), and the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Is provided with a first input port 122.

Further, the input section 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the above-mentioned various switches. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-shooting test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is input to the ports 122, 123,
Not supplied to 124. The data set in the ports of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that one-way communication is performed so that no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and transmits data for notifying special test symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating a probability state of a big hit via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-production product) installed in a game shop. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting port switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test-shooting test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal such as the magnetic sensor 61 or the board radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as it is is once taken in by the game microcomputer 111 and processed into another signal or information, for example, the game machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the test is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-shooting test apparatus. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test firing test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. At the port on the relay board 70, the game microcomputer 11
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open a special variable winning device 38 (a special winning opening solenoid) 38b and a movable member 37 of the normal variable winning device 37.
Second for outputting the opening/closing data of the solenoid (normal solenoid) 37c for opening b
An output port 134 is provided. The second output port 134 also outputs the display data of the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and accessory ratio.

Also, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. ON/OFF of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting off data.

Further, the output unit 130 outputs information about the gaming machine 10, such as jackpot information, to the external information terminal board 7.
A fifth output port 137 for outputting to 1 is provided. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, for example, so as to display information about the gaming machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132. Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a sixth output port 170 for outputting the display data of the probability setting value display device 153 displaying the selected probability setting value.

In addition, the output unit 130 receives a opening/closing data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 38b or the universal solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134 to generate and output a solenoid drive signal, which is a first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , The second driver 1 for outputting the ON/OFF drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135
38b, a third driver 138c that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the fourth output port 136, and is supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 and a fifth driver 138e that receives display data output from the second output port 134 and causes the status display device 160 to display the data are provided. ..

To the first driver 138a, DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as the power supply voltage in order to drive the solenoid operating at 32V. Further, DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line according to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic driving method is performed by causing a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V and drawing out a current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs selected in sequence and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided not on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the main board, but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photo coupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 500. Photo coupler 13
9, the gaming microcomputer 111 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the data transmission/reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300, like the gaming microcomputer 111, is an amusement chip (IC).
A main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying an image on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , A sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound in order to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b
Equipped with.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 including a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and a storage content even if power is not supplied at the time of power failure. A FeRAM 323 that can be held and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 that is a time counting unit that generates information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect contents and instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 for a reproduced sound, lights a decorative lamp, and drives the motor. And drive control of the solenoid, management of production time, etc. are executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, it is possible to transmit commands and data in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30.
C, a synchronization signal STS that gives a data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
From the main control microcomputer 311 to the main control microcomputer 311 to wait for reception of the interrupt signals INT0-n and the command and data from the main control microcomputer 311 to notify the processing status such as the completion of drawing in the VRAM. The signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is sent from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
Is entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 is provided. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Via this command I/F331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300 are changed to the effect control command signal (effect command). ) To receive. Gaming microcomputer 111 of gaming control device 100
Operates at 5V DC and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at 3.3V DC, so the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

Further, in the effect control device 300, a board decoration LED control circuit for driving and controlling the board decoration device 46 and the sub information display device 90 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). 332, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided in the glass frame 15, a game board 30 (including the center case 40) Board production device 4 provided
A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control 4 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances effect effects in cooperation with effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control the lamps, motors, solenoids, etc., include an address/data bus 340.
It is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via. It should be noted that the glass frame 15 is provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a production device), and the movable production member that operates is a frame that forms a movable production device that produces a game including a special figure variation display game. A rendering device may be provided and a frame rendering movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame rendering device may be provided.

Further, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. To detect the ON/OFF state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) and input a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311;
A switch input circuit 336 for detecting the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 configured as described above.
32V for driving a motor or a solenoid, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, a DC 12V for driving a motor or an LED, in order to supply a DC voltage of a desired level to the electronic parts controlled by the DC5 that is the power supply voltage for the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15V voltage for driving a motor, an LED, and a speaker. Furthermore, as the main control microcomputer 311, 3.3V or 1.2V
When using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as, DC 3.3V based on DC 5V
The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating or DC1.2V. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 and puts the device in the reset state. In addition, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
, And is supplied to an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, and the like to reset them. In addition, the production control device 300 has a cooling FA that cools each part of the gaming machine 10.
The cooling FAN 45 is driven when N45 is connected and the effect control device 300 is powered on.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game ball (from a launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32 (
A game is performed by hitting a pachinko ball). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the universal figure starting gate 34 and the general winning opening 35. , The winning prize 36, the normal variation winning device 37 or the special variation winning device 38, or it flows into the outlet 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. And general winning a prize mouth 35
When a game ball is won in the starting winning port 36, the normal variation winning device 37 or the special variation winning device 38, the number of award balls according to the type of the winning port is controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3). From the payout unit, the glass plate 15 is discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23.

Inside the universal figure starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 is provided,
When the game ball hit in the game area 32 passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. CPU 11 of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100
In 1A, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the universal figure starting gate 34, if the universal figure starting memory number is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), the universal figure starting memory number is set. The addition (+1) is performed and one ordinary figure starting memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The number of stored universal figure starting prizes is displayed on the universal figure hold indicator 56 of the collective display device 50. Further, in the universal figure starting memory, a random number value for determination of hit (random number value for determination) for determining the result of the universal figure variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when there is a general figure starting memory and the general figure variable display game can be started, that is, the general figure variable display game is not being executed, the general figure variable display game hits and the normal variable prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If the hit state is not the hit state, the hit judgment random number value stored in the most commonly stored figure start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit/miss of the figure change display game. Then, the process of starting the universal figure variation display game is performed. When the random number for hit determination coincides with the determination value, the general figure variable display game becomes a win and a specific result mode (normal figure specification result) is derived.

Further, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns for a predetermined variation time on the public figure display 53 provided in the collective display device 50 as a process of executing the general figure variable display game. After performing the universal figure changing display which is repeatedly displayed in the order, the process of displaying the universal figure changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result is stopped and displayed is performed.
In addition, the universal figure display 53 is configured by the display device 41, and, for example, numbers, symbols,
A character pattern or the like may be used, and after it is variably displayed for a predetermined time, it may be stopped and displayed to display the result.

When the result of the universal figure fluctuation display game is a hit, the lighting pattern that is one of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol that forms a special result mode on the universal figure display 53 according to the type of hit While displaying the stop, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated to perform the control of opening the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the general-picture variation display game is off, control is performed to display a lighting pattern on the public-picture display 53, which is a result mode of the off-going.

The winning ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided inside.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first start memory which is the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning in the start winning opening 36 is a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).
In addition to storing up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4), a second starting memory, which is a starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning of the ordinary variable winning device 37, is stored. Based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random value are extracted as starting memory information, respectively, and the extracted random numbers. The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first starting memory or the second starting memory. The number of stored starting memories is displayed on the special figure 1 hold indicator 54 and the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 of the collective display device 50, and also on the display device 41 of the center case 40 the decorative special figure start memory. Displayed as a display. Further, it is also displayed on the first sub display unit 91 and the second sub display unit 92 of the sub information display device 90.

When the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game is ready to start, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores the first start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game to be started. The generated big hit determination random number value is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B and set in accordance with the probability setting value, and the processing of determining the hit of the special figure variable display game is performed. Further, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure variation display game to be executed.

When the first special figure variation display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 1 display 51 (variation display device) over a predetermined variation time. After performing the special figure 1 changing display, processing for displaying the first special figure changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed. In the case of executing the second special figure variable display game, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 2 display device 52 (variable display device) over a predetermined fluctuation time. After performing the special figure 2 changing display, the process of displaying the second special figure changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result is stopped and displayed.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, a plurality of types of identification information corresponding to the special figure variable display game on the display device 41 (variable display device) (for example,
A process for displaying a decorative special figure variable display game in which numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed. Further, the sub game display unit of the sub information display device 90 performs a process of displaying a decorative special figure variable display game in which the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit is changed corresponding to the special figure variable display game. Further, in the effect control device 300, based on a control signal from the game control device 100, setting of effect state, output of sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, processing for controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game or the like).

In the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41, for example, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above on the display device 41 is changed to the left variable display area (first special symbol),
In the right fluctuation display area (second special symbol) and the middle fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variably displayed (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed that is difficult to identify. Then, after a predetermined time, the symbols that are changing are stopped in order of the left variation display area, the right variation display area, and the middle variation display area, and stopped in each of the left variation display area, the right variation display area, and the middle variation display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode configured by the displayed identification information. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as the appearance of characters are performed for the purpose of improving the interest.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, gives a special result mode or a small hit result mode to the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special view 2 display device 52. While displaying the lighting pattern, processing for generating a special game state or a small hit game state is performed. Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 is also the special result mode or the small hit result mode.

In the process of generating a special game state or a small hit game state, C of the game control device 100
The PU 111A controls, for example, by opening the opening/closing door 38c of the special variation winning device 38 with the special winning opening solenoid 38b to allow the game balls to flow into the special winning opening. Then, until a condition that either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is won in the special winning opening or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the special winning opening, the special winning opening is achieved. 1 to open
It is set as a round, and control (cycle game) for continuing (repeating) this for a predetermined number of rounds is performed. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a special winning opening opening/closing control unit that controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result appearance becomes the special result appearance. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is off, control is performed to display the deviation result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high-probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this high-probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than in the normal probability state. In addition, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation game. Both floating display games are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game, after the special game state is finished, as a game state is a time saving state (specific game state, general figure high probability state, second operation state).
Can occur. In this short-time state, the probability that the hit result of the universal figure variation display game (general figure probability) is a high probability (general figure high probability state) higher than 0 which is the normal probability (general figure low probability state). Is possible. As a result, the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case of the normal variation winning device 37 being in the normal figure low probability state. Here, in the normal variation winning device 37 in this embodiment, the universal figure probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.
That is, the operation state of the normal variation winning device 37 is configured to be controlled in one of a first operation state and a second operation state in which winning is easier than in the first operation state. ..

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the figure change display game (the figure change time) is, for example, 500 ms, and the figure stop time for displaying the result of the figure change display game is, for example, 6
When it becomes 00 msec and the ordinary figure variation display game is a hit result and the ordinary variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time of the first hit stop symbol (universal opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500).
msec x 1 time), 2nd hit stop symbol opening time (normal electric opening time) and number of times of opening (eg 17
00msec×2 times), 3rd hit stop symbol opening time (normal electric opening time) and number of times of opening (eg,
1700 msec×3 times) can be set.

In addition, the execution time of the universal figure variation display game, the universal figure stop time, the number of regular electricity open, and the universal electricity open time are appropriately set so that the general figure variation display game and the ordinary variation prize winning device 37 are controlled to be in the time saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, the execution time (
It is possible to control the normal figure variation time) to be the second variation time shorter than the first variation time (for example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the universal figure stop time for displaying the result of the universal figure change display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec. 704 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, when the universal figure variation display game is a hit result and the regular variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal communication opening time) is set to the normal state (normal figure low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than the first opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1
352 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal variation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times of normal electric power open) is set to the first number of times of opening (for example, two times) with respect to one hit result of the universal figure variation display game.
It is possible to set the second number of times of opening more than that (for example, four times). In the time saving state, the probability that the hit result of the figure variation display game (universal figure probability) is higher than the normal probability in the normal operation state (general figure low probability state, for example, 1/251). The probability (universal figure high probability state, for example, 250/251) can be used.

In the time saving state, the general variation prize winning device 37 is opened by changing one or more of the universal figure variation time, the universal figure stop time, the number of universal communication open, the universal communication open time, and the universal figure probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states that are different from each other. Further, in the case of a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be different. The high-probability state and the time saving state can occur independently of each other, both of them can occur at the same time, or only one of them can occur.

The special display 1 display unit 51 and the special display 2 display unit 52 may be separate display units or the same display unit, but each special display variation display so that they are not executed independently or at the same time. The game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use different display devices or different display areas for the first special figure variable display game and the second special figure variable display game, or use the same display device or display area. However, the decoration special variable display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. Further, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. Also,
The second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when there is a starting memory of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, and the special figure variation display game can be executed, the second special figure variation display game is It is designed to be executed (prioritized). Further, in the description of the present embodiment, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variation display game.

Although not particularly limited, the start port 1 switch 36 in the start winning port 36 is
a, a starting opening 2 switch 37a, a gate switch 34a, a winning opening switch 35a, a large winning opening switch 38a, and an out switch for detecting all game balls that have been launched into the game area 32 A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter, referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a magnetic detection coil and detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil is used. There is. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 or the like is a micro switch having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 5 and 6 and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, first, the process of inhibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area for saving the value of the register etc. when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, the register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and a predetermined register (
For example, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in the D register) (step S4)
.. In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the higher order, and the leading 00h is set in step S4. Then, a signal to stop firing is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the firing, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 3 (third input port 124) is read (step S6),
A process for setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the program of the sub-control means (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 that is the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal activation is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (the game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. It forms a standby means for setting the standby time.

In addition, the power-on delay timer is timed using a storage area (a RAM area or a register or the like that is not the target of validity determination) that is not the target of validity determination (checksum calculation) of RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, and thus it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

The third input port 124 has a set value changing switch 151 and a setting key switch 1
A signal from the switch 52 and a signal from the main frame opening detection switch are input, and by reading the state of the third input port 124 before the start of the standby time, the set value change switch 151 at power-on Also, the state of the setting key switch 152 and the open state of the front frame 12 (main frame) can be grasped. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes an opening/closing detection means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the front frame 12. As described above, the front frame 12 is opened,
When the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position, the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed is set. When the power is turned on with the setting value change button pressed down without setting the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position, RA
The M111C is cleared (initialized). Since the setting key operation unit and the set value change button cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened, the front frame 12
Is required to be released.

By reading the state of the third input port 124 before the start of the standby time, it is possible to reliably detect the operation of the set value change button. That is, if the state of the set value change switch 151 is read after the lapse of the waiting time, it is necessary to continue to operate the set value changing button from the time when the power is turned on to the lapse of the waiting time. However, by reading the state before the start of the waiting time, it is not necessary to perform such a troublesome operation, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the initialization operation performed at power-on cannot be accepted.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) are performed.
First, the number of times (for example, twice) the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). When the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (step S10;
N) returns to the determination whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game machine waits until the power is cut off. in this way,
By determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the power failure due to noise or the like, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a malfunction at power-on. ..

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring occurrence of power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power failure that has occurred during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a defect at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power shutdown are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and the timer value is 0. Is determined (step S12). If the timer value is not 0 (step S
12; N), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the timer value is 0 (step S
12; Y), that is, when the waiting time is over, access to the read/write memory (RWM) such as RAM and EEPROM is permitted (step S13), and off data is output (output to all output ports). Is set) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port that is installed in advance in the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15).
Next, it is judged whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah) (step S16), and if the value is normal (step S16; Y).
, The value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal, the power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h
) Is determined (step S17). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S17; Y), checksum calculation processing for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S18), and the calculated checksum and power-off It is determined whether the checksums of the two match (step S19). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a legitimacy determination unit that determines whether the information stored in the storage unit is valid when the power is turned on. If the checksums match (step S19; Y), the RAM clear start address 2 is set (step S20), and it is determined whether the probability setting value change state is set (step S2).
1). When the probability setting value changing state is set, it is possible to determine because the probability setting value changing flag is set.

If it is in the probability setting value changing state (step S21; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and the process of initializing the RAM and the probability setting value changing state in which the probability setting value can be changed are performed. Note that it is determined here that the probability setting value is being changed when the power is shut off and the RAM data is normally backed up while the probability setting value is being changed. In this case, the probability setting value is again set. The value is changed. If the probability setting value change state is not set (step S21; N), the state of the previously read third input port 124 is changed to the body frame (
It is determined whether the front frame 12) is in the open state (step S22).

In the storage area of the RAM 111C, a probability setting value area, an initial value random number area, a variation pattern random area, a game control area, and a status display area are set in order from the beginning. In the area for probability setting values, a probability setting value area for storing information on the currently set probability setting value and a work area for temporarily storing various information in the process of changing or confirming the probability setting value are set. To be done. This work area includes a work probability setting value area for storing information on the probability setting value selected in the probability setting value changing state, and an area for storing various flags. In the area for initial value random numbers, big hit symbol initial value random numbers, small hit symbol initial value random numbers, hit initial value random numbers, and hit symbol initial value random numbers that are updated at any time are stored. Further, the variable pattern random numbers 1 to 3 which are updated at any time are stored in the variable pattern random number area. In the game control area, a work area in which information (various data and programs) necessary for performing game control is stored and a stack area are set. In addition, a work area for storing information necessary for displaying a base value, a character ratio, etc., and a stack area are set in the work area for status display.

The base value is calculated from the number of game balls detected by the out switch that detects all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been shot in the game area 32 and finished playing, and the number of payouts based on winning in the prize area. The information required to display the base value includes, for example, information regarding the number of game balls detected by the out switch and information regarding the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. In addition, the ratio of the accessory character is in the big hit state (that is, fanfare and ending) out of the total number of award balls (total number of award balls) obtained by winning the prize hole from turning on the game machine 10 to the present. It is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired by each character) obtained by winning the special winning prize in (excluding inside) (so-called continuous character ratio), and the information necessary to display the character ratio. The information includes, for example, information on the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) and information on the number of prize balls (acquired ball count by role goods).

The RAM clear start address 2 is the start address of the area for the initial value random number, and by performing the process of clearing the RAM with this address set, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the The area for game control will be cleared. The area for the initial value random number and the area for the variable pattern random number may not be included in the clear target. Further, a RAM clear start address 1 which will be described later is a start address of the area for the probability setting value, and the RAM is cleared while this address is set, whereby the area for the probability setting value and the initial value random number are set. The area for use, the area for changing pattern random numbers, and the area for game control (work area and stack area) will be cleared. Further, a RAM clear top address 3 which will be described later is the top address of the area for game control, and RA is set with this address set.
By performing the process of clearing M, the area for game control will be cleared.

The status display area is initialized if it is abnormal by judging the validity in the status display edit output processing in the timer interrupt processing described later, but the backed up information is not normal. In the process of clearing the RAM with the RAM clear start address 1 set in this case, the state display area may be initialized. That is, in the process of clearing the RAM when the RAM clear start address 1 is set, all areas of the RAM 111C may be initialized.

In the checksum calculation processing of step S18 and step S57 described later, the checksum is calculated only for the work area for game control. One or more of the probability setting value area, the initial value random number area, the variation pattern random number area, the game control area, and the status display area may be targeted. When targeting multiple areas, the checksum of each area may be calculated individually and the correctness may be determined individually, or the checksums of the areas may be summed to determine the correctness. You may make it judge collectively.

When the body frame is in the open state (step S22; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state from the state of the third input port 124 read previously (step S23).
). If the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S23; Y), step S35
Then, the process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability setting value to the probability setting value changing state are performed. If the setting key switch is not on (step S23; N),
If the main body frame is not in the open state (step S22; N), the process proceeds to step S24, and it is determined from the previously read state of the third input port 124 whether the set value change switch is in the on state (step S24). To do.

If the set value change switch is not in the ON state (step S24; N), step S30
Move to and perform the processing when the power is restored normally. If the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S24; Y), the process proceeds to step S41 to initialize the initial value random number area, the variable pattern random number area, and the game control RAM area. Perform processing. That is, the set value change switch 151 also has a function as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 stores data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Forms an initialization means for initializing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the power failure inspection area is not normal check data (step S
16;N or step S17;N), if it is determined that the checksums do not match (
In step S19; N), the process proceeds to step S25, and initialization processing of all RAM areas is performed. That is, the probability setting value RAM area and the status display RAM area are initialized only when a RAM abnormality occurs. Further, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variable pattern random number, and the RAM area for the game control are not only when the setting value change switch 151 is turned on as described above, but also when the RAM abnormality occurs. Is also initialized.

First, the RAM clear top address 1 is set (step S25), and the previously read third address is set.
From the state of the input port 124, it is determined whether the body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state (step S26). If the body frame is in the open state (step S26; Y), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 previously read whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S27). If the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S27; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and the process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability setting value to the probability setting value changing state are performed. As will be described later, the RAM is initialized in steps S35 and S36. In this case, the RAM clear start address 1 is set, so that the area for the probability setting value and the random value for the initial value are set. The area, the variation pattern random number area, and the game control area (work area and stack area) are cleared and the initial values are saved. The area for displaying the status may be initialized here.

If the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S27; N) or the main frame is not in the open state (step S26; N), the command (specific information) of the setting change instruction is given to the effect control board (effect control device). 300) (step S28), RAM access is prohibited (step S29), control is stopped, and power supply to the gaming machine is awaited. Performance control device 30
At 0, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board production device 44, and the speaker 19a are received based on the reception of the command of the setting change instruction. , 19b to output a voice or the like to notify that the probability setting value should be changed. This notification is continued until the power of the gaming machine is shut off.

In this case, if the front frame 12 is opened after turning off the power of the gaming machine and the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position and the power is turned on again, the setting key is processed in step S27. It is determined that the switch is on (step S27; Y), and step S35.
Then, the process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability setting value to the probability setting value changing state are performed. In addition, when the control is stopped in step S29, the front frame 12 is not opened after the power source of the gaming machine is shut off, or the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not turned to the second position. When the power is turned on again, the data in the RAM remains abnormal and the state cannot be changed to the probability set value changing state, so that the processes in steps S28 and S29 are performed again.

Although the notification is made by transmitting the setting change instruction command to the effect control device 300 in step S28, the game control device 100 may make the notification. For example, the notification may be performed on the collective display device 50 controlled by the game control device 100, and the display which is not used as the identification information is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52. Alternatively, a display may be provided to notify the abnormality.

In step S30 of FIG. 6 as a process when the power is restored normally, the initial value when the power is restored is saved in the area to be initialized (step S30). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area that stores the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been finalized. Indefinite. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal is not fixed. Then, the area for storing the game state in the RWM is examined to determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state (step S31).

Here, if the probability of the special figure is not high (step S31; N), steps S32 and S3.
Skip 3 and move to step S34. When the probability of the special figure is high (step S31; Y), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S32), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30 is set. The ON (lighting) data of is saved in the segment area (step S33).

And the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S34), and step S45. Go to. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S34, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the probability setting value information that is the information of the selected probability setting value, and the screen designation. A plurality of commands such as a command (for example, a customer waiting demo command when in the customer waiting state, a restoration screen command in other cases) is transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a performance number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability setting value information that is the information of the probability setting value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability setting value is performed, and the effect of the game is changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible to execute an effect that suggests or notifies the probability setting value, such as changing the selection probability.

The screen designation command transmits a command according to the restarted game state. When restarting the special figure variation display game interrupted by the power shutdown accompanying the restart of the control, a recovery screen command forming recovery information is transmitted as a screen designation command. Further, in this case, information regarding the result of the restarted special figure variation display game is also transmitted. Further, when the power is cut off in the customer waiting state and the control is restarted in the customer waiting state due to the restoration of the power supply, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted as the screen designation command. Further, in the case of restarting the special game state that was interrupted due to the power shutdown with the restart of the control, the special game state restart command is transmitted as the screen designation command.

Further, in step S35 of FIG. 6, the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 as the processing of initializing the RAM and the processing of changing the probability setting value to the probability setting value changing state (step S35).
35), the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S36).
Here, when the backed up information is normal and the process shifts from step S21 or S23, since the RAM clear start address 2 is set, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the game control The RAM area (work area and stack area) is cleared to 0 and the initial value is saved. That is, the probability setting value area and the status display area are not initialized. However, it is not necessary to clear the area for initial value random numbers and the area for fluctuation pattern random numbers.

On the other hand, if the backed up information is abnormal and the process moves from step S27, RA
Since M clear start address 1 is set, the area for probability setting value, the area for initial value random number, the area for random pattern random number and the area for game control (work area and stack area) are cleared and initialized. The value is saved. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an initialization unit that can initialize the storage unit based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the setting key operation unit). The area for displaying the status may be initialized here.

The area to be initialized is an area in which a value other than 0 is desired to be set in the area cleared to 0, and is, for example, a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the effect mode. When all the RAM areas are cleared to 0, the probability setting value becomes setting 1 by setting 0 in the probability setting value area. By setting the probability setting value with the lowest probability,
Even if the RAM is cleared due to an abnormality or a fraudulent act, damage to the amusement store can be minimized. If a value other than 0 is set as the initial value, a specific probability setting value (for example, setting 3) can be set when the entire RAM area is initialized.

After that, the probability setting value changing flag is set as a process for changing the probability setting value to the probability setting value changing state (step S37). As a result, the probability set value is changed. Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S38). As a result, it becomes possible to display information on the probability setting value currently set on the probability setting value display device 153.

Then, the value of the probability setting value area is loaded, the value is saved in the work probability setting value area (step S39), and the command whose probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S40). , And proceeds to step S45. In the effect control device 300, the display of the display device 41 or the sub information display device 90 is displayed based on the reception of the command during the probability setting change,
LED light emission of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, operation of the board effect device 44, speaker 19
A notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed is given by outputting a voice by a or 19b. Although the RAM is initialized, the command for RAM initialization is not transmitted to the effect control device 300 here. Also, settings for outputting a security signal are made. In this case, a timer may be set to output the security signal for a predetermined time, or the security signal may be continuously output during the period in which the probability set value is changed. Further, since the RAM has not been initialized yet here, the setting for outputting the security signal may be omitted.

Further, in step S41 of FIG. 6, RA is performed as the initialization processing of the RAM area for game control.
The M clear start address 2 is set (step S41), the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S42), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S43). As a result, the initial value random number area, the variable pattern random number area, and the game control RAM area (work area and stack area) are cleared to 0, and the initial value is saved. Also, a timer for outputting a security signal is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an initialization unit that can initialize the storage unit based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the set value change button).

Then, the command for RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S44), and the process proceeds to step S45. In the case of this embodiment, in step S44,
Model designation command, special figure 1 hold number command, special figure 2 hold number command, probability information command,
Probability setting value information which is information on the selected probability setting value, RAM initialization command (to display a customer waiting demo screen and to notify the RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) Multiple commands). Also, depending on the model,
In addition to these commands, a performance number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability setting value information that is the information of the probability setting value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability setting value is performed, and the effect of the game is changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible to execute an effect that suggests or notifies the probability setting value, such as changing the selection probability.

In step S45, a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator)
Perform the process to activate the circuit. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S45, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S46). Specifically, the CPU 111 sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit.
Performed by A. Also, a bit transposed pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. A bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). Is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may set it arbitrarily.

After that, a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on
The value of is extracted, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining the winning symbol of the special figure (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random numbers for determining the hit of the general figure (random number ), after saving in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) of a random number (a winning symbol random number) for determining the hit symbol of the universal symbol (step S47), the interruption is permitted (step S48).
Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step S49) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. In the present embodiment, in the initial value random number updating process, the big hit symbol initial value random number, the small hit symbol initial value random number, the hit initial value random number, and the hit symbol initial value random number are updated (for example, +1 update). Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that becomes the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure variation display game, "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the special figure variation display It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the small hit stop pattern of the game. Also, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that becomes the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the universal figure variation display game, and the "hit symbol initial value random number" is the hit stop symbol of the universal figure variation display game. Is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines. In this way, the randomness of random numbers can be enhanced by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main process. Incidentally, the small hit random number does not naturally exist in a model without a small hit. In addition, depending on the model, there is also a gaming machine in which there is no random number for the initial value of the winning symbol.

Further, although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. Is configured. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are processed by the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt processing) that has the same cycle as the unit of the timer interrupt processing. Also, in the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, the so-called "initial value changing method" that changes the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round Is adopted. Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter method by +1 or -1, or may be a random update by which all values within the range appear in a scattered manner without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number updating process in step S49, the number of times the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read through the port and the data bus and checked (for example, twice)
Is set (step S50), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S5).
1). When the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S51; N), the initial value random number updating process (
Return to step S49). That is, when the power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (step S48) before the initial value random number updating process (step S49), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt process by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

In addition to the main process, the initial value random number updating process in step S49 includes a method of performing the initial value random number updating process in the timer interrupt process as well. In order to prevent the value random number updating process from being executed, when performing the initial value random number updating process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update the interrupt to cancel the interrupt. There is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number updating process when the initial value random number updating process is not performed in the timer interrupt process and only in the main process.
This has the advantage that the main process is simplified.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step S50 (step S52).
.. Then, if the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S5)
2; N) returns to the determination whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51). Further, if the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S52; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, a process of temporarily interrupting (step S53).
), a process of outputting off data to all output ports (step S54) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S55
), the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S56).
Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S57) for calculating the checksum when the RWM is powered off and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S58), the RW
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step S59), it waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before power shutdown is correctly backed up. It can be judged when re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game in general, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that performs various controls according to instructions from the main control means. ), and the main control means delays the start of the main control means when the power is turned on and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting the start of the slave control device (game control device 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring occurrence of power failure during the predetermined standby time.

In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100), RAM111C capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (setting value change button, setting key operation unit) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization unit (game) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. The control device 100) and the operation state of the initialization means are read before the start of the waiting time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to permit access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

In the above main process, after performing the process of step S28, the process of step S26 is performed.
The process returns to step S26 to S2 until the setting key switch is turned on.
The process of 8 may be repeated. That is, the game control may be stopped to wait until the setting key switch is turned on. In this case, in steps S26 and S27, the determination is made based on the current state of the third input port 124 instead of the state of the third input port 124 read in step S6. Further, step S2
When the state of repeatedly performing the processing of 6 to S28 continues for a certain period of time, step S2
You may make it shift to 9 and wait for the power supply cutoff.

Further, here, the condition for shifting to the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed is that the main body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state and the setting key switch is in the on state.
The open state of the front frame 12 may not be a condition. Further, both the opening of the front frame 12 and the opening of the glass frame 15 may be a condition, or only the opening of the glass frame 15 may be a condition.

Alternatively, the setting key switch may not be provided, and the probability setting value change state may be set only when the setting value change switch is in the ON state. That is, steps S22 and S
If the set value change switch is in the ON state in step S24 without performing the process of 23 (step S24; Y), the process may proceed to step S35 of FIG. In this case, the processing of steps S41 to S44 in FIG. 6 for initializing the initial value random number area, the variable pattern random number area, and the game control area is not performed, but the setting is changed in the probability setting value changing state. It is possible to initialize only the area for initial value random numbers, the area for random pattern random numbers, and the area for game control by ending without setting or setting the same probability setting value and ending. If the setting value change switch is switched to the probability setting value change state only on condition that the switch is in the ON state in this manner, the configuration of the RAM clear switch in the conventional pachinko gaming machine can be used.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to a player The control unit (game control device 100) for controlling, and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned, the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152),
A setting means (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)), and the control means stores the stored contents even in a power-off state. A storage unit (RAM 111C) that can be held and a validity determination unit that determines whether the information stored in the storage unit when the power is turned on is valid (game control device 10)
0) and an initialization means (game control device 100) capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit for selecting the probability setting value, and stored in the storage means by the validity determination means. If it is determined that the stored information is not valid, the notification that prompts the selection of the probability setting value is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the return to the normal state. Also, R
By the initialization of the AM111C, the probability setting value information set in the game store is also lost and the initial value is set, but by informing the selection of the probability setting value, the game is initialized. It is possible to prevent the probability setting value that is not intended by the store from being left set.

Further, the control means is configured so that the probability setting value can be selected when the operation section is operated when the power is turned on, and the information stored in the storage means is stored by the validity determination means. If it is determined that the probability setting value is not valid, the notification for prompting the selection of the probability setting value is continued until the power is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state, and it is possible to prevent the probability setting value which is not intended by the game store from being set by the initialization.

Further, the control means stops the control of the game and waits for the selection of the probability setting value when the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid. It will be. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state, and it is possible to prevent the probability setting value which is not intended by the game store from being set by the initialization.

Further, the game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect based on the information from the game control means, the game control means, When the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid, the specific information is transmitted to the effect control means to stop the control of the game, and the effect control means determines the specific information. This means that the notification for prompting the selection of the probability setting value is performed based on the reception of the. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state, and it is possible to prevent the probability setting value which is not intended by the game store from being set by the initialization.

Further, when the specific information is received, the effect control means is configured to continue the notification prompting the selection of the probability setting value until the power is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state, and it is possible to prevent the probability setting value which is not intended by the game store from being set by the initialization.

In addition, a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, the game is controlled in a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a player a game value. The control means (game control device 100) and the probability setting values to which the probability values used for the lottery of the game are assigned are the first operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and the second operation unit (setting value). Setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a change button (setting value change switch 151)), and the control means,
A storage unit (RAM111C) capable of holding the stored contents even when the power is off is provided, and when the first operation unit and the second operation unit are not operated when the power is turned on, based on the information stored and held in the storage unit. When the first operating unit is restored and the power is turned on, the probability setting value can be changed by the setting means when the first operating unit is operated, and only the second operating unit is operated when the power is turned on. If so, it means that the storage means is initialized. Therefore, the work of changing the probability setting value and the work of clearing the RAM can be selectively performed using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency at the game shop can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide an operation section more than necessary, the cost for manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation section can be reduced.

Further, the setting means can change the probability setting value by operating the second operation unit in the changeable state. Therefore, it is possible to perform the operation of selecting the probability setting value and the operation of selecting the initialization using the same operation unit, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency in the game store. Further, it is not necessary to provide an operation section more than necessary, the cost for manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation section can be reduced.

Further, the control means is provided with a validity determination means (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on, and the validity determination means stores it in the storage means. When it is determined that the stored information is not valid and the first operation unit is not operated, the notification that prompts the initialization of the storage unit is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the return to the normal state.

Further, the control means is configured to change the probability setting value by the setting means to a changeable state and to initialize the storage means when the first operation unit is operated when the power is turned on. If the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid and the first operation section is not operated, the first operation section is operated. This means that a notification prompting the power to be turned on is given. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the return to the normal state.

In addition, a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, the game is controlled in a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a player a game value. The control means (game control device 100) and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change). It is necessary for the control of the game by the setting means (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the switch 151)) and the control means that includes information on the probability setting values selected by the setting means. Storage means capable of storing information (RAM 11
1C), and the control means is adapted to initialize the storage means when the power of the gaming machine is turned on while a predetermined operation portion of the plurality of operation portions is operated. .. Therefore, the work of changing the probability setting value and the work of clearing the RAM can be selectively performed using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency at the game shop can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide an operation section more than necessary, the cost for manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation section can be reduced.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, the timer interrupt process is
The periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is the CPU 1
It is started by being input to 11A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 7 is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step S1).
01). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing the register saving process of moving the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) is performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S104) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (special winning opening solenoid 38b, universal electric solenoid 37c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the launch permission state as seen from the game control device, and the second signal indicating the launch permission state seen from the payout control device (the launch permission signal) is also payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the firing control device. That is, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both of them are allowed to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, random number update processing 1 (step S10) for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number that is the target of the initial value random number update process.
5), random number update processing 2 (step S106) for updating the random number of the variation pattern for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 is performed. After that, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the universal gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 3
5a, a special winning opening switch/state monitoring process for monitoring whether or not a normal signal is inputted from the special winning opening switch 38a and for monitoring an error (whether the front frame or the glass frame is not opened) (step) S107) is performed.

Next, a probability setting value changing process (step S1) for performing a process related to changing or confirming the probability setting value.
08) is performed to determine whether the probability setting value change state is set (step S109). When the probability setting value changing state is set, it is possible to determine because the probability setting value changing flag is set. When the probability setting value change state is not set (step S109; N), it is determined whether the probability setting value confirmation mode is set (step S110). The probability set value confirmation mode is a state in which the probability set value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed.

If it is not the probability set value confirmation mode (step S110; N), as a process relating to the progress of the game, a payout command transmission process (step S111) for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, Special figure game processing (step S112) that performs processing relating to the figure variation display game, and general figure game processing (step S113) that performs processing relating to the figure variation display game are performed. On the other hand, when the probability setting value is changed (step S
109; Y) or in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S110; Y), the process shifts to step S114 without performing the above-mentioned processing relating to the game. That is, in the probability set value changing state and the probability set value confirmation mode, the game cannot be progressed.

In the probability setting value changing state or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the payout command transmitting process (step S111), the special figure game process (step S112), and the general figure game process (step S113) are not performed. However, it may be performed for one or more of these. For example, the payout command transmission process (step S111) may be performed, and the prize balls may be paid out. Further, processing other than the above-described processing may be included as processing that is not performed in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode. For example, in the probability setting value change state, the random number update process 1 (step S105) and the random number update process 2 (step S10).
6) may not be performed and the random number may not be updated in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode. Further, the types of processing that are not executed in the probability set value change state and the probability set value confirmation mode may be different.

Next, the segment LED edit processing (step S114) for driving the segment LEDs provided in the gaming machine 10 for displaying the special figure variation display game and various information regarding the game so as to display desired contents, the magnetic sensor 61. Magnet irregularity monitoring processing (step S115) for checking the detection signal from the panel to determine whether there is an abnormality, and panel radio irregularity for performing the processing for checking the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality Monitoring process (step S1
16) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S117) of setting signals to be output to various external devices is set in the output buffer, and the base value is calculated from the number of game balls detected by the out switch and the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. A state display edit output process is performed to calculate (step S118), and the timer interrupt process ends.

Here, in this embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating register bank 0) At this time (at the end of timer interrupt processing), it is automatically performed. Note that, depending on the CPU used, there is also a gaming machine in which it is necessary to instruct execution of a process of restoring the interrupt prohibited state and a process of restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S104) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 8, in the output process, first, OFF data is output (reset) to the output port 135 that outputs the data of the segment of the collective display device (LED) 50 (step S141). Next, the data to be output to the output port 134 for outputting the data of the special winning opening solenoid 38b and the universal electric solenoid 37c are combined and output (step S142).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S143), and the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is updated.
The output data of the digit line is acquired (step S144). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Then, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S145), and the combined data (for example, "door/frame open" data, "security signal" data) is output to a digit/external information output port. 136
Is output (step S146).

Thereafter, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S147), and the loaded data is output to the segment output output port 135 (step S148). As a result, the plurality of light emitting display units provided in the collective display device 50 are controlled by dynamic control.

Subsequently, various output data of external information are combined (step S149), and the combined data (
For example, the data of "big hit signal 1", the data of "big hit signal 2", the data of "big hit signal 3", the data of "big hit signal 4", the data of "symbol confirmation frequency signal", the data of "starting mouth signal" , "Main prize ball signal data" and the output data of the launch permission are combined (step S1).
50), the combined data is output to the output port 137 for outputting external information/launch permission signal (step S151).

Next, the OFF output data of the probability setting value display is set as the display content on the probability setting value display device 153 (step S152), and it is determined whether the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S153). The probability setting value display permission flag indicates the probability setting value display device 15.
This is a flag that is set when the display regarding the probability setting value is permitted in 3.

When the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S153; Y),
The probability setting value display data is loaded from the probability setting value display data area (step S154),
The display data is output to the output port 134 for displaying the probability set value (step S155). As a result, the probability setting value display device 153 displays the probability setting value. On the other hand, if the probability setting value display permission flag is not set (step S153; N), the display data is output to the output port 134 for displaying the probability setting value (step S155). In this case, the off output data set in step S152 is set, and the probability setting value display device 15
Nothing is displayed in 3.

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. Yes (step S156). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S157).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. Yes (step S158). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S159). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test-shooting test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S160).

Next, the test signal output data having the probability setting value is loaded (step S161). Here, the probability setting value display data is loaded as the test signal output data from the probability setting value display data area. That is, the data for display of the probability set value display device 153 is used as it is for the information on the probability set value of the test signal to the test shooting device. This simplifies the process and allows the output of accurate information without changing the probability setting value information. Of course, the display data may be converted into value information and output.

Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S162), and if it is not in the on state (step S162; N), the process proceeds to step S184. If it is in the ON state (step S162; Y), the loaded data and the setting key switch ON information are combined (step S163), and the process proceeds to step S184. After that, the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 6 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus (step S164), and the output process ends.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S111) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 9, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 constitutes a prize ball command counter capable of storing information on the prize ball command.

The number-of-wins counter area 2 is for transmitting a main award ball signal to be output to an external device each time the number of award balls (scheduled payout number) generated by winning the prize is reached to a predetermined number (here, 10). In the area to be used, winning data corresponding to prize balls for which the main prize ball signal has not been generated is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 constitutes a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, the payout prize ball signal is output from the payout control device 200 to the external device each time the number of prize balls actually paid out reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). And by comparing these two signals,
It is possible to monitor unauthorized payouts.

In each of these prize number counter areas, there is a prize number counter area for each number of prize balls set for each prize hole (in the present embodiment, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). Is provided, and the count number of the corresponding prize number counter area is incremented by 1 based on the winning of the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The prize number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the prize number counter area 2 so that more prize data can be stored. This is because while the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, the payout command may suspend the transmission depending on the state of the payout control device 200 which is the destination, so that more untransmitted This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, the three prize ball counter areas of the winning number counter area 1
Up to 65535 prizes can be stored in the individual prize ball counter area and the 14 prize ball counter area, respectively, and the three prize ball counter area, the 10 prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize prize of the prize number counter area 2 can be stored. The ball counter area is configured to store up to 255 prizes.

In the process of checking whether there is a count in the number-of-wins counter area 2 (step S181), “0” is set in the number-of-wins counter area to be checked among the plurality of number-of-wins counter areas provided for each number of prize balls. Determine whether there is a count number that is not. Then, if there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is checked whether the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas have been checked. The determination is made (step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. on the other hand,
If it is determined that all the checks are not completed (step S183; N), step S
Returning to step 181, the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area→10 prize ball counter area→14 prize ball counter area.

If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184).
, Obtains the number of payouts corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 2 (step S18).
5). Then, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area is added to the acquired number of payouts (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S187). As the value of the remaining number of prize balls area before this processing, a fraction less than a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

After that, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189), and if it is not 0 (step S189; N), step S189 is performed.
The processing moves to 192. When the number is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, every time the number of remaining prize balls reaches 10, the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S191), and step S18
Return to the process of 8. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output unit that outputs a main prize ball signal including information about the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with winning of the game balls to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. .. By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of the game balls is concentrated during a big hit, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game balls, and the exact value generated during the big hit. It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of special prize balls cannot be counted.
Here, the processing of steps S181 to S191 is processing of updating (increasing) the number of times the main prize ball signal is output, and the processing of steps S192 to S201 is processing of transmitting a payout command.

In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S1).
93). When the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is ended. When the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S194).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control. If the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control, the payout busy signal indicates an on state (busy state). To be done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal is a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control.

When this payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194; Y), the payout command transmitting process is ended. That is, in the present embodiment, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time has elapsed (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 side can pay out the prize ball. If it is in a state, it is configured to send a payout command. As described above, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, it is possible to perform wasteful processing by not performing the subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. It is designed to prevent and reduce the control burden.

Conditions for the payout busy signal to be in the on state (busy state) are, for example, during payout operation, during ball lending operation, during shot ball out error, during overflow error, during frame radio wave illegal occurrence, payout ball detection switch (paid ball). The number of award balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 (the number of award balls not yet paid out = the number of remaining game balls remaining) ) (When not equal to 0), etc.

When the payout busy signal is not busy (step S194; N), it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). Prize counter area 1
In the process of checking whether there is a count in step S195 (step S195), among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each number of prize balls, there is a count number other than "0" in the prize number counter area to be checked. Determine whether.

Then, if there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196) to check whether the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas have been checked. The determination is made (step S197). With this judgment,
If it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks are not completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 to repeat the above process. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area→10 prize ball counter area→14 prize ball counter area.

If it is determined in step S195 that there is a count (step S195; Y), the count in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198).
The payout number command corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step S199). Then, the obtained payout number command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and 200 msec, for example, is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one prize in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control can start the payout control. In this case, the prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means.

In this way, the game control device 100 controls to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the prize is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not yet been paid out will be held in the game control device 100 side, so that it will be backed up in the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and backed up in the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be realized without the function for performing.

In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, in conventional gaming machines, a function for backing up is required,
There was a problem that it would lead to higher costs. According to the present invention, it is possible to realize accurate payout control without providing the payout control device 200 with a function for backing up.

In addition, the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, so the main prize ball signal can be output without delay. The time can be accurately grasped, and for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since the prize ball command counter capable of storing information on the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings. The signal information can be managed separately, and the information can be managed reliably.

From the above, while performing the game control comprehensively, the winning area provided in the gaming area 32 (starting winning opening 36, normal variation winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variation winning device 38)
A game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on winning of a game ball to the payout control means for performing payout control of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. (Payout control device 200), and the game control means, based on a status signal (busy signal) output from the payout control means and showing whether or not the payout control means can start payout control When the control for transmitting the command to the payout control means is performed and a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control means immediately. The prize ball command is paid out in response to the fact that the status signal indicating that the payout control means can start the payout control is continuously output for a predetermined period without transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means. This means that it is transmitted to the control means.

In addition, in the game area 32, a winning area having a different number of prize balls (starting winning opening 36, normal variation winning device 3
7, general winning holes 35, special variation winning device 38) are provided, and the game control means (game control device 100) has not transmitted the prize ball command for instructing the payout control of the game balls for each number of prize balls. Is provided with a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying, the state signal indicates that payout control can be started, and when each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command, The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the status signal indicates whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control to each prize ball command counter. This means that the determination is made prior to specifying whether or not there is a prize ball command.

In addition, the game is controlled in a centralized manner, and a prize ball command is issued based on a prize of a game ball to a predetermined prize area (starting prize hole 36, normal variable prize device 37, general prize hole 35, special variable prize device 38). And a payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing payout control of game balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means.
The game control means is a prize ball when the status signal output from the payout control means indicating whether or not the payout control can start the payout control can start the payout control. A prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) for transmitting a command to the payout control means, and a prize ball signal (main which includes information about the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with winning of a game ball in a predetermined winning area) (main External information output means (game control device 100) for outputting a prize ball signal) to the outside of the gaming machine
And the external information output means outputs the prize ball signal regardless of whether the state signal output from the payout control means is capable of starting the payout control. Becomes

In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives the prize ball command even if the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started when a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200) and the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started, and the prize ball command is issued in response to the state continuing for a predetermined period. This means that the information is sent to the payout control means.

In addition, the game control means (game control device 100), the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information on the prize ball command, and the prize capable of storing information on the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). With a ball signal counter (game control device 100), the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) has a predetermined winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variation winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variation). A prize ball command is generated in units of one winning award to the winning device 38), and when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, the one prize ball command is paid out control means (
It is configured to transmit to the payout control device 200), and the prize ball command counter (game control device 10
0) is capable of storing information of the prize in units of one prize in a predetermined prize area, updating when a game ball is won in the predetermined prize area, and giving a prize ball command to the payout control means. The number of award ball commands that have not been transmitted can be stored by updating in response to the transmission to the external information output means, and the payout is determined in accordance with the winning of the game ball in the predetermined winning area. It is configured to accumulate the number of prize balls and output a prize ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine each time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number, and the prize ball signal counter is a unit of one prize in a predetermined prize area. Information on the prize can be stored, and is updated when the game balls are won in the predetermined prize area, and is updated in correspondence with the process of accumulating the number of prize balls by the external information output means. It is possible to memorize the number of prize balls that have not been played.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 outputs a main prize ball signal each time the planned number of game balls to be paid out reaches 10, and the payout control device 200 outputs the game ball number of 1
The main prize ball signal is output every time the number of balls becomes zero.
Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the main prize ball number signal output count by +1 for every 10 payout schedules (each time a payout command is transmitted) (subroutine in the payout command transmission process).
Then, the main prize ball signal is output as many times as the updated (set) number of outputs.
With respect to the main award ball signal output for each schedule, since the award ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 payouts are actually performed, the schedule and the result can be matched, It is possible to deal with illegal payouts. In addition, even if you win during the big hit period, even if the payout is delayed due to lack of balls, etc. Information can be collected (judged).

[Winning prize switch/Status monitoring processing]
FIG. 10 shows a winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S1) in the timer interrupt process.
07). In the winning opening switch/state monitoring process, it is first determined whether or not the probability setting value change state is set (step S299). When the probability setting value changing state is set, it is possible to determine because the probability setting value changing flag is set. When the probability setting value change state is not set (step S299; N), it is determined whether the probability setting value confirmation mode is set (step S299).
300). The probability set value confirmation mode is a state in which the probability set value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed.

When it is not the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S300; N), the processing after step S301 is performed as the processing regarding the progress of the game. On the other hand, if the probability setting value is being changed (
If it is the step S299; Y) or the probability set value confirmation mode (step S300; Y), the process proceeds to step S309. That is, in the probability setting value changing state and the probability setting value confirmation mode, the game cannot be progressed without performing the process related to winning.

In the probability setting value changing state or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the special variable winning device 38 is monitored for fraud and winning, the ordinary variable winning device 37 is monitored for fraud and winning, and a winning port that allows regular winning is selected. The prize winning is not monitored, but it may be monitored for one or more of these. For example, the special variable winning device 38 or the normal variable winning device 37 may be monitored for fraud. Further, processing other than the above-described processing may be included as processing that is not performed in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode. For example, the processing after step S309 may not be performed. Further, the types of processing that are not executed in the probability set value change state and the probability set value confirmation mode may be different.

In step S301, the prize-winning mouth monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the prize-winning entrance switches 38a in the prize-winning entrance (special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step S301). The fraud & prize monitoring processing (step S302) is executed to monitor whether there is an illegal prize in the winning opening and detect a normal prize.

In the prize-winning mouth monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether there is an input to the target switch, a lower address of the fraud monitoring information, a lower address of the fraudulent winning number area,
The information of the illegal prize winning error notification command, the upper limit value of the illegal prize winning number (the number of illegal occurrence determinations), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the notification timer update information (permission/update) is defined. In addition, in the winning table of the winning port monitoring table, the number of times the monitoring is repeated (the number of switches)
In addition, for each switch, information on the monitoring switch bit, the lower address of the winning number counter area 1 and the lower address of the winning number counter area 2 is defined. The prize hole monitoring table is prepared in accordance with each switch to be monitored.

After that, the winning a prize monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other winning a prize opening switch 38a in the award winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and the winning a prize is open even though the winning a prize opening is not opened. A fraud that monitors your mouth for illegal prizes and detects normal prizes
The winning monitoring process (step S304) is executed.

Next, prepare a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in Poden (step S305), and monitor Poden for an unauthorized winning even though Poden is not open. At the same time, a fraud & prize monitoring process (step S306) of detecting a normal prize is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switches (for example, the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) capable of always winning is prepared (step S30).
7), the winning number counter updating process (step S308) for updating the winning number is performed.

Next, the state scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal of the plurality of switches and signals whose states should be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (step S309). In the case of the present embodiment, the status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. After that, the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 for setting the status to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the status scan counter (step S310). Then, the gaming machine state check process (step S311) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, by referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is "0", the switch abnormality output due to occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like Monitoring of the state based on the 1 signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "1", monitoring of the state based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is "2", the status monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "3", the status monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. R.

Next, the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the status to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the status scan counter (step S312). Then, a gaming machine status check process (step S313) for determining a status such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 2, when the value of the status scan counter is “0”, the glass frame open detection switch 63
The status monitoring is set based on the signal output from the, and the value of the status scan counter is "1".
If it is, monitoring of the state is set based on the signal output from the main frame opening detection switch 64. Further, when the value of the status scan counter is "2", the status monitoring based on the frame radio wave incorrect signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "3", the status monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S314), and if the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the winning opening switch/status monitoring process is executed. finish. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. In addition, when the value of the error scan counter is “0” (step S314; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315).
), a gaming machine status check process for determining a status such as whether an error has occurred (step S
316) is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, by referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, when the value of the status scan counter is "0", the switch abnormality output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like Monitoring of conditions based on two signals is set. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is "1" to "3".

After that, the payout control device 200 performs a payout busy signal check process (step S317) for checking a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control can be started, and ends the winning opening switch/state monitoring process. Note that the processing of steps S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is "0", and therefore is executed once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 msec, the processes of steps S315 to S317 are performed every 16 msec.

[Probability setting value change processing]
FIG. 11 shows the probability setting value changing process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In the probability setting value changing process, first, it is determined whether the probability setting value is in a changed state (step S401). If the probability setting value is not in a changed state (step S401; N), the probability setting value can be confirmed. The probability setting value confirmation process is performed (step S422), and the probability setting value changing process is ended.

If the probability setting value change state is set (step S401; Y), -1 is updated if the probability setting value extinction timer is not 0 (step S402), and it is determined whether the probability setting value extinction timer is 0. .. If the probability setting value extinction timer is 0 (step S403; Y), the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S404), and the process proceeds to step S405.
In this case, the probability setting value information is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 by the output process (see FIG. 8) described above. If the probability setting value extinction timer is not 0 (step S403;
N) moves to step S405. In this case, the probability setting value display permission flag is not set, and the output processing described above causes the probability setting value display device 153 to display nothing.

Then, it is determined whether the probability setting value has been changed (step S405). The probability set value changed is a state in which a confirming operation described later is performed and a probability set value used in the game is newly set, and in this case, the probability set value changed flag is set. If the probability setting value has been changed (step S405; Y), the process proceeds to step S416. If the probability setting value has not been changed (step S405; N), it is determined whether there is an input from the setting value change switch (step S406).

Then, in the determination as to whether there is an input from the setting value change switch (step S406), it is determined whether the input state from the setting value change switch has changed to the ON state. That is, it is determined whether the probability setting value change button has been pressed. If there is no input from the setting value change switch (
The step S406; N) moves to the step S411.

If there is an input from the setting value change switch (step S406; Y), the value in the work probability setting value area is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 5. The values 0 to 5 in the work probability setting value area correspond to settings 1 to 6, respectively, and the value of the work probability setting value area is updated by +1 each time the setting value change button is pressed. , The selected probability setting value will change sequentially. It should be noted that when the value of the work probability setting value area is +1 when the value is 5, the value is returned to 0. Further, at this stage, only the value of the work probability setting value area is changed, and the value of the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value used for the game is not changed. The probability setting value selected based on the confirming operation described below is saved in the probability setting value area. Further, although the number of probability setting values is six here, it is also possible to use a number other than this.

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the working probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S408). As a result, the data displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 becomes information on the newly selected probability setting value. Then, an initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability setting value extinction timer area (step S409), and the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S410). Thereby, as a specific display for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms) from the operation of the setting value change button, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is turned off and a blank display in which nothing is displayed is performed, and then the new probability setting value information is displayed. Will be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated.

Here, the blank display in which nothing is displayed is set as the specific display, but a display other than this may be set. For example, in the case of displaying the probability setting value with numbers 1 to 6,
A display other than this number may be used as the specific display. That is, the specific display may be a display that is not used as the display of the probability setting value. Moreover, when displaying the probability setting value in a continuous lighting state, the updated probability setting value may be blinked as a specific display. That is, the specific display may be a display mode different from the display mode after the specific display has elapsed. Examples of the display mode used as the specific display include a display mode in which the display blinks, a display mode in which the blinking cycle is different from the case where the display is not the specific display, and a display mode in which the display color is different from the case where the display is not the specific display. ..

Also, information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the operation of the set value change button, the display of the display device 41 or the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46,
You may make it perform the specific notification which is a notification that the selected probability setting value was changed by operation|movement of the board production apparatus 44, the audio|voice output by the speakers 19a and 19b, etc. That is,
The specific notification may be given together with or instead of the specific display. Further, the same display as the probability setting value display device 153 may be displayed on the display device 41, the special figure 1 display device 51, and the special figure 2 display device.

Next, it is determined whether there is an input from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (
Step S411). The touch switch is a sensor that can detect contact of the human body with the operation handle 24, and outputs a signal when there is contact. If there is no input from this touch switch (step S411; N), the probability setting value changing process ends. If there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y), the value of the work probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the probability setting value area (step S412). This allows
The selected probability setting value is set as the probability setting value used in the game. That is, touching the operation handle 24 is a confirming operation for confirming the selected probability setting value. Of course, an operation other than this operation may be a finalizing operation, and an operating unit for the finalizing operation may be provided in the setting means.

Thereafter, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S413). Next, the probability setting value changed flag is set (step S414), a command for changing the probability setting value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S415), and the probability setting value changing process is ended. .. In the production control device 300, the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90 are received based on the reception of the command for changing the probability setting value.
Is displayed, the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 are emitted, the operation of the board effect device 44, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like to notify that the probability setting value has been changed.

On the other hand, if the probability setting value has been changed (step S405; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is off (step S416). If the setting key switch is not off (
Step S416; N), that is, if the setting key of the setting key operation unit is at the second position, the probability setting value changing process ends. When the setting key switch is off (step S416; Y), that is, when the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not in the second position, the RAM is set.
The clear start address 3 is set (step S417), the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S418), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (
Step S419).

As a result, the RAM area (work area and stack area) for game control is cleared to 0 and the initial value is saved. Also, a timer for outputting a security signal is set. That is, the probability setting value region, the initial value random number region, the variation pattern random number region, and the state display region are not initialized. However, the area for initial value random numbers and the area for fluctuation pattern random numbers may be cleared. Also, of the areas for probability setting values, areas related to changing work, such as the probability setting value area for work that temporarily stores information on the probability setting values selected in the probability setting value changing state and various flags, are cleared. R. Therefore, the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared, and the display on the probability setting value display device 153 ends. Further, since the probability setting value changing flag is cleared, the probability setting value changing state ends.

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S420), and a command for ending the probability setting change is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) ( (Step S421), and the process proceeds to step S48 of the main process shown in FIG. In the production control device 300, based on receiving the command for changing the probability setting value,
Display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46
Of the light, the operation of the board production device 44, the output of the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b,
It notifies that the change of the probability setting value has been completed. This notification also serves as a notification that the RAM has been initialized.

In the case of the present embodiment, in step S421, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the probability setting value information that is the information of the selected probability setting value, and the probability setting. A plurality of commands such as a command for ending the change (a command for displaying the customer waiting demo screen and for notifying the RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) are transmitted. The command for ending the probability setting change may be a RAM initialization command. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a performance number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability setting value information that is the information of the probability setting value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability setting value is performed, and the effect of the game is changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible to execute an effect that suggests or notifies the probability setting value, such as changing the selection probability.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to a player The probability setting values to which the probability values used in the lottery are assigned are set to a plurality of types of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). From the operation of the operation unit, the setting unit (gaming control device 100) is provided, and the setting unit includes a display unit (probability setting value display device 153) that displays information on the selected probability setting value. When the display of the display unit is updated as the probability setting value is selected, the specific display is performed for a certain period from the update. Therefore, it is possible to easily understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

Further, the setting means is adapted to display, as the specific display, a display that is not used for displaying the information of the probability setting value. Therefore, it is possible to easily understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

Further, the setting means is configured to display the updated information for a certain period of time in a manner different from that after the certain period of time has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to easily understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
FIG. 12 shows the probability setting value confirmation processing (step S422) in the probability setting value changing processing. In this probability setting value confirmation processing, it is first determined whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S431). The probability set value confirmation mode is a state in which the probability set value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed. In the probability set value confirmation mode, the probability set value confirmation mode flag can be determined because the flag is set.

If it is not the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S431; N), the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S432). As a result, a state in which nothing is displayed is set as the display of the probability setting value display device 153. After that, it is determined whether the game is in progress (step S
433).

"Playing" refers to a case where the special figure variation display game is being executed, the public figure variation display game is being executed, a special game state is in progress, or a general figure is in a hit state. That is, this is a case where the game state is a prohibition state that prohibits starting the probability set value confirmation mode. If the game is being played (step S433; Y), the probability setting value confirmation processing ends. That is, when the game is being played, the mode does not shift to the probability set value confirmation mode. In this case, the effect control device 300 may be informed that it is not in the game because it is in the game, so that the probability setting value confirmation mode cannot be entered.

The conditions for determining that the game is in progress (prohibited state) are not limited to those described above. The condition may be one or more states selected from the running state of the special figure variation display game, the execution of the general figure variation display game, the special game state, and the hit state of the general figure. It may be determined that the game is being played when either the variable display game is being executed or the special game state is being applied. In addition, conditions other than the above may be added, for example, if the operation handle 24 is operated and there is an input from the touch switch, it may be determined that the game is in progress and the probability set value confirmation mode may not be entered.

Also, even if the game is not played for a predetermined period after the game balls are detected by the out switch that detects all the game balls that have been shot in the game area 32 and finished playing, the probability set value confirmation mode may not be entered. good. Further, while the front frame 12 is closed, it may be determined that the game is in progress and the probability set value confirmation mode may not be entered. Further, during the power saving mode in which a certain period elapses in the state where no game is being played, the probability setting value confirmation mode may not be shifted. The power saving mode is released when the front frame 12 is opened, and the power saving mode can be regarded as the front frame 12 being closed.

When the game is not in progress (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state, that is, whether the operation section has been operated and is in the predetermined state (step S433).
434). If the setting key switch is not on (step S434; N), the probability setting value confirmation processing ends. If the setting key switch is in the on state (step S4)
34; Y) sets the probability setting value confirmation mode flag (step S435) and sets the probability setting value display permission flag (step S436). As a result, the probability setting value confirmation mode is started, and the information of the probability setting value currently set is displayed as the display of the probability setting value display device 153.

Then, save the initial value in the security signal control timer area (step S437),
The command for confirming the probability set value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S438), and the probability set value confirmation process ends. When the probability set value confirmation mode is started, a security signal is output as external information for a predetermined period. In the effect control device 300, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the board effect are performed based on the reception of the command during confirmation of the probability set value. The operation of the device 44, the output of voice from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like notify that the probability setting value is being confirmed.

On the other hand, if it is in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S431; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S439). If the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S439; Y), the probability setting value confirmation processing ends. in this case,
The probability setting value confirmation mode continues.

If the setting key switch is not on (step S439; N), the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is cleared (step S440), and the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S441). As a result, the probability setting value confirmation mode ends, and the probability setting value display device 153 is set to display nothing. Then, a command for ending confirmation of the probability set value is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S442).
, The probability setting value confirmation process ends. The effect control device 300 ends the notification that the probability setting value is being confirmed based on the reception of the command for confirming the probability setting value.

That is, the probability set value confirmation mode is started by turning the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position with the power turned on, and ended by returning from the second position. When the power is turned on while the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position, the probability setting value change state is set.

As described above, even if the setting key switch is turned on during the game, the probability setting value confirmation mode is prevented from shifting to prevent the probability setting value from being known while the game is in progress. It is possible to secure the fairness of the game. It should be noted that even if the setting key switch is turned on during the game, the probability setting value confirmation mode is not shifted, but the setting key switch is turned on during the game, and the state is not in the game with the on state. In case of, it shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode from that point. By doing so, the probability setting value can be automatically confirmed when the game does not progress, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

Also, the condition for not shifting to the probability setting value confirmation mode is set to be during the game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode according to the state of the game controlled by the game control device 100. What is necessary is to select whether or not to do. For example, in the high probability state, the probability set value confirmation mode may not be entered. Further, as will be described later, it is possible not to shift to the probability set value confirmation mode when a predetermined abnormality has occurred.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to the player The control unit (game control device 100) for controlling, and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned, the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152),
And a setting means (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). Based on the state, it is possible to set a confirmation state in which the probability setting value can be confirmed, and the game state controlled by the control means is a prohibition state that prohibits starting the confirmation state. In this case, even if the operation unit is in the predetermined state, the confirmation state is not set. Therefore, it becomes possible to select whether or not to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode depending on the state of the game, and it is possible to prevent inconvenience caused by the probability setting value being displayed.

The prohibited state means that the game is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known while the game is in progress, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

In addition, the prohibited state is a state during the special game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known while the game is in progress, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

In addition, the game ball can be converted into a closed state in which the prize cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be easily won, and a normal variable winning device 37 that can generate a game execution right by winning, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. Based on the above, a general figure game (general figure variation display game) is executed, and when the result of the general figure game is a specific result, the normal variation winning device 37 is converted to an open state (general figure hit state). It is provided with a normal variation winning device control means (game control device 100) that can be generated, and the prohibited state is a state in which the general-university game is being executed or is in a hit state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known while the game is in progress, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

Further, the setting means sets the operation unit to a predetermined state in a state in which the game state controlled by the control means is in a prohibited state, and when the prohibited state ends while the predetermined state is maintained, Upon completion, the confirmation state is set. Therefore, the probability setting value can be automatically confirmed when the game does not progress, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

[Special game processing]
Next, details of the special figure game process (step S112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the special figure game process, the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 3
The input of 7a is monitored, the entire process relating to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the display of the special figure is set.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the special figure game process, first, a starting port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring winning of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring processing, the normal winning a prize device 3 which forms the starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening
If there is a winning of the game ball in 7, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted, and the game result based on the winning is determined in advance before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the winning. Make a decision.

Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this special winning opening switch monitoring processing, processing for monitoring the detection of a game ball by the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38 is performed.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). The value of the special figure game processing timer is "
If it is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if it has timed up or has already timed up, the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is registered. (Step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6).
Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A7).

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the variation start setting and effect setting of the special figure variation display game and the special figure variation are in progress. Special figure normal processing (step A8) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
If the special figure game process number is "1" in step A7, the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure and the information necessary for performing the special figure displaying process are performed. (Step A
Perform 9).

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, setting of fanfare commands according to the type of big hit, and a special winning opening for each big hit Special figure display processing (step A10) for setting fanfare time according to the opening pattern and setting information necessary for performing fanfare/interval processing
)I do.

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "3", the opening time of the special winning opening is set, the number of times of opening is updated, and the information necessary for performing the special opening opening processing is set. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step A11).
In step A7, if the special figure game process number is "4", the interval command is set if the jackpot round is not the final round, while the ending command is set if the jackpot round is the final round, or the special winning opening remains. A special winning opening opening process (step A12) for setting information necessary for performing the ball process is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure game process number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening and the big hit ending process are executed. Special winning hole remaining ball processing (step A13) for setting the information necessary for performing
I do.
When the special figure game process number is "6" in step A7, a big hit ending process (step A14) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure normal process.

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "7", in order to perform the opening time and opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command setting, and the processing during the small hit. A small hit fanfare middle process (step A15) for setting necessary information is performed.
In step A7, if the special figure game process number is "8", the process for setting the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process, etc.
16) is performed.
In step A7, if the special figure game process number is "9", a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls won in the special winning opening during the small hit medium process and a small hit ending process The small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting the information necessary for carrying out is carried out.
When the special figure game process number is "10" in step A7, a small hit ending process (step A18) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure normal process.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A
19), the symbol variation control process (step A20) relating to the control of the variation of the special symbol by the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A21), a symbol fluctuation control process (step A22) relating to the control of the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. , The special figure game process ends. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processes are performed. To do.

The small hit is a result mode in which the condition device is not operated, and the big hit is a special result in which the condition device is operated. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure variation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol), and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and special condition as a special electric accessory. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the continuous accessory operating device is operated). When the condition device does not operate, it means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag which is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch which is turned on and off electrically. Further, the "conditional device" is a term that is generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term that has different meanings.

[Starting switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the starting opening switch monitoring processing, first, the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) winning award monitoring table is prepared (step A101), the hard random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed, and then, 1 It is determined whether or not there is a winning in the starting opening (step A103).
When it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the first starting opening (step A103
In N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning in the first starting opening (step A103
In 103;Y), it is determined whether or not the special time saving is in progress (supporting universal communication) (step A).
104).

When it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing is not shortened (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing is being shortened (step A104;
In Y), a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) for transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 is performed. That is, in the time saving state, a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) does not win unless left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 does not win right-handedly. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the game state in which the right-handed is more advantageous than the left-handed is a gaming state, but when there is a winning in the first starting opening during the time-shortened (that is, when left-handed is hit during the time-shortened) In addition, the right control instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 issues a notification (warning) for instructing the right control.
Next, after preparing a table for setting the information on hold by the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A107), the special figure starting opening switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37) is prepared for a winning monitoring table (step A1).
09), a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning in the second starting opening (step A111).
When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the second starting opening (step A111)
In N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning in the second starting opening (step A111)
111; Y), the ordinary electric auditors (ordinary variation winning device 37) is in operation, that is,
It is determined whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is operated and the gaming ball is in the open state in which the winning can be achieved (step A112), and it is determined that the normal electric auditors product is operating (step A112; Y). , And proceeds to the processing of step A114 to perform the subsequent processing. On the other hand, step A
When it is determined in 112 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not the illegal electric power generation is occurring (step A113).

In the determination as to whether or not there is a fraudulent fraud, it is determined that fraud has occurred if the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraudulent determination number (for example, 5). In the normally variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or dishonesty has occurred,
When there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal prizes.
Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

If it is determined in step A113 that the illegal attempt to generate a universal telephone is not occurring (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37) (step A114), Figure common start switch common processing (step A115)
The starting port switch monitoring process ends. Further, when it is determined in step A113 that the unauthorized use of general electric power is occurring (step A113; Y), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second starting memory is not generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) in the above-mentioned starting opening switch monitoring process.
, A110) will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 15, in the hard random number acquisition process,
First, of the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37),
The winning-free information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A121), and the starting opening 1 switch 3 is set.
It is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored among 6a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends. On the other hand, when there is an input to the starting port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether the target random number latch register has latch data (step A124). ..

When there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, when the random number is not extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends. If the target random number latch register has latch data (step A124; Y), the jackpot random number extracted is loaded into the hard random number latch register to be monitored and prepared (step A125).
). Then, among the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37), the winning information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition processing is performed. finish.

[Common processing for special figure start switch]
Next, details of the special figure starting port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process commonly performed for each input when the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are input.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the special figure starting port switch common processing, first, the starting port 1 switch 36
Of the start switch 2a and the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port signal output count, which is the number of times information about the number of winnings to the start switch to be monitored is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10, is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A133). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the starting port signal output number area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the starting port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is "255", the value after updating becomes "0" by the +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the output count overflows.

Next, it is determined whether the number of special figure suspension (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value (step A135). If the number of reserved special maps to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135; N)
) Ends the special figure starting port switch common processing.

If the number of reserved special maps to be updated is less than the upper limit value (step A135; Y), the number of reserved special maps to be updated (the number of reserved special maps 1 or the number of reserved special maps 2) is updated by +1 ( Step A13
6) The target starting opening winning flag is saved (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting port switch and the special figure holding number to be monitored is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 of the hard random number acquisition process is stored as the big hit random number of RWM. The data is saved in the area (step A139). Next, the big hit symbol random number of the starting mouth switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not the winning is to the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A14).
2).
When it is determined in step A142 that the winning is not in the first starting opening (step A142)
; N), the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A142 that the first start opening has won (step A142).
142; Y), a small hit symbol random number is extracted, prepared (step A143), and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A144).

Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) is performed.
Next, a starter switch to be monitored and a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure reservation number are prepared (step A147), and a performance command setting process (step A148) is performed.
The special process starting port switch common processing ends.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of the game ball in the starting winning area 36 and the starting area of the normal variation winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variation display game. A starting storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit is stored. Further, the starting storage means (game control device 100) uses various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as a first starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Various random number values that are stored and extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (ordinary variation winning device 37),
It is stored as a second starting memory with a predetermined number being the upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the special figure reservation information determination process (step A14) in the above-described common start port switch process.
Details of 6) will be described. The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetch process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 17, first, the starting opening winning flag saved in step A137 of the special drawing starting opening switch common processing is checked to determine whether the winning is to the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36). (Step A151).
When it is determined in step A151 that the winning is not in the first starting opening (step A151
; N), the process proceeds to step A154.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A151 that the winning is the first start opening (step A151)
151; Y), it is determined whether the special drawing is being shortened (step A152).

If it is determined in step A152 that the special figure is being shortened (step A152; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A152 that the special drawing is not shortened (step A152;
In N), it is determined whether a big hit or a small hit is in progress (step A153).
When it is determined in step A153 that a big hit or a small hit is in progress (step A1
In 53; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A153 that the big hit or the small hit is not in progress (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value. The big hit determination process (step A154) is performed. If the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting mouth switch is set (step A156), and at step A140 of the special drawing starting mouth switch common processing. The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether or not the winning is in the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A158).
When it is determined in step A158 that the winning is not in the first starting opening (step A158)
; N), the stop symbol information of the outlier is set (step A163), and step A164
Process shifts to.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A158 that the winning is the first start opening (step A158).
158; Y), a small hit determination process (step A159) is performed to determine whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value. Then, if the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information of the out is set (step A
163), and proceeds to the processing of step A164.
On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), the small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and the small hit symbol prepared in step A143 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the random number (step A1
62) and the process proceeds to step A164.

Then, a read-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A165). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A166) of setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and a variation pattern setting process of setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A167).

After that, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A168), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A169), the special figure reservation information determination processing is ended.

The big hit determination process in step A157 and the small hit determination process in step A159 are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 20 and 21 which are executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process. That is, the determination is performed according to the set probability setting value. Further, the special figure information setting process in step A166 and the variation pattern setting process in step A167 are similar to the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

By the above processing, a read-ahead symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory of the pre-reading target, and a look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory are prepared. And transmitted to the performance control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information (whether it is a big hit or not and the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the starting memory is controlled before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding starting memory. The device 300 can be informed, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure changing display game. It becomes possible to inform.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (
For example, it determines whether or not a special result will be obtained). Note that the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance not only at the time of the winning prize when the starting memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is performed. Good.

[Special processing of special drawings]
Next, details of the special figure normal process (step A8) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, in the special figure normal process, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 holding number (second starting memory number) is "0" (step A301). If it is determined that the special figure 2 reserved number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reserved number (first starting memory number) is "0" (step A305). Then, the special figure 1 reservation number is "0" (step A3).
05; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step A309).
If the customer waiting demo has not started (step A309; N), the customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A311), and effect command setting processing (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" related to special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A313), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A314). Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A315), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A316).
), the special figure normal processing ends. That is, when the special figure variation display game can be started, but the starting condition is not satisfied, the customer control demo command that is the customer waiting demo command forming the waiting information is produced.
Will be sent to.
On the other hand, in step A309, if the customer waiting demo has been started (step A309;
In Y), the process of steps A310 to A312 is not performed, and the process proceeds to step A313.

Further, in step A301, if the number of special figure 2 reservations is not “0” (step A301;
N) prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (step A302).
). Next, effect command setting processing (step A303) is performed, and special figure 2 variation start processing (
Step A304) is carried out, and the special figure normal processing is ended.
In addition, in step A305, when the number of special figure 1 reservations is not “0” (step A305;
N) prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number (step A306).
). Next, effect command setting processing (step A307) is performed, and special figure 1 variation start processing (
Step A308) is carried out, and the special figure normal processing is ended.

In this way, the special figure 2 pending number is checked before the special figure 1 pending number is checked, so that when the special figure 2 pending number is not "0", the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304). Will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. In other words, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as the variable display game based on the first start memory. It forms a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game.

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start processing (step A308) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 19A, first, a special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the variation symbol determination area (step A321),
The deviation information and the big hit information are set in the big hit flag 1 for judging whether or not the first special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, and it is judged whether or not the first special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit. The big hit flag 1 setting processing (step A322) for setting the deviation information and the small hit information for the small hit flag for performing is performed.

Next, special figure 1 stop design setting processing (step A) relating to the setting of special figure 1 stop design (design information)
323) is performed, a special figure information setting process (step A324) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and various kinds of setting related to the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game are performed. A special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referencing information is set, is prepared (step A325). After that, a variation pattern setting process (step A326) of setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process of setting variation start information of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A327) is performed.

Next, "1" for the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A328).
, Save the process number in the special figure game process number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and the signal related to the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the blinking control timer (special figure 1 display unit 5
The initial value (here, 100 ms) of the timer of the blinking cycle of 1) is set (step A33).
3). Next, the initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 variation start processing is ended.

[Special map 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (step A304) in the above-mentioned special figure normal process will be described. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and is the same as the process of the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. It is intended for memory.

As shown in FIG. 19B, first, a special figure 2 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the variation symbol determination area (step A341), and the second
The big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a big hit is subjected to big hit flag 2 setting processing (step A342) for setting deviation information and big hit information.

Next, special figure 2 stop design setting processing (step A) relating to the setting of special figure 2 stop design (design information)
343), after performing special figure information setting processing (step A344) for setting special figure information that is a parameter for setting the variation pattern, various kinds of settings relating to the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game are performed. A special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to information is set, is prepared (step A345). After that, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed.

Next, "1" for the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A348).
, Saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A350), and the signal related to the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the blinking control timer (special figure 2 indicator 5
The initial value (here, 100 ms) of the timer of the blinking cycle of 2) is set (step A35).
3). Next, the initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start processing is ended.

In addition, when selecting the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start processing or special figure 2 variation start processing, the information of the set probability setting value may be referred to. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests or informs the probability setting value, such as selecting a variation pattern according to the probability setting value or changing the selection probability of the variation pattern according to the probability setting value.

[Big hit determination processing]
Next, the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process
) And the big hit determination process performed in the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described.

As shown in FIG. 20, in this jackpot determination process, first, an upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A381). The upper limit judgment value table is provided for each probability set value, and the upper limit judgment value in the high probability state and the upper limit judgment value in the low probability state (normal probability state) are defined respectively. Here, the corresponding table is set according to the currently set probability setting value. The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit. By setting the upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability setting value, the big hit judgment can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability setting value.

Next, the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value is set (step A382), and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A383). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value is the same value regardless of the probability setting value or the probability state (high probability state or normal probability state),
The lower limit judgment value may be different depending on the probability setting value and the probability state. In this case, like the upper limit judgment value, the lower limit judgment value table in which the lower limit judgment value is specified for each probability setting value is selected according to the probability setting value, and the lower limit judgment value to be used is selected according to the probability state. And set it. Of course, the upper limit judgment value table and the lower limit judgment value table may be combined into a judgment value table.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A383; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A389), and the big hit judgment process is ended. It should be noted that the out-of-range in step A389 means that it is not a big hit, and there is a possibility that it will be judged as a small hit in the subsequent small hit determination processing. If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A3
83; N) determines whether or not there is a high probability state (step A384). Then, in the high probability state (step A384; Y), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability is acquired (step A384).
385), it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A38).
7). If it is not in the high probability state (step A384; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step A386), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A387). .. The upper limit judgment value acquired here is acquired by referring to the upper limit judgment value table set in step A381.

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A387; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A358), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A387; N), that is, if it is a big hit, the big hit is set as the judgment result (step A389), and the big hit judgment processing is ended.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process
) And the small hit determination process performed in the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described.

As shown in FIG. 21, in this small hit determination process, first, a small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A401). The small hit upper limit judgment value is provided for each probability setting value. Further, the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether or not it is in a high probability state. Further, the range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value do not overlap in the same probability setting value. The range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value between different probability setting values may or may not overlap.

The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a series of multiple values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the upper limit of the small hit judgment value, which is the upper limit value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit. By setting the small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value, the small hit judgment is performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability setting value.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A402).
). Here, the small hit lower limit determination value is the same even if the probability setting values are different. When the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A402; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A404), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A402; N), it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A403).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A403; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A404), and the small hit judgment processing is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A403; N), that is, if it is the small hit, the small hit is set as the judgment result (step A405), and the small hit judgment process is ended. To do.

Similar to the case of the big hit judgment, the small hit upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability setting value may be set first, and the small hit upper limit judgment value may be acquired from the set upper limit judgment value table. The upper limit judgment value in the big hit judgment and the small hit upper limit judgment value in the small hit judgment may be collectively defined in the judgment value table provided for each probability setting value. Further, the small hitting lower limit judgment value is the same even if the probability setting values are different, but the small hitting lower limit judgment value may be changed depending on the probability setting value. Select the small hit lower limit judgment value.

Also, a process of setting an upper limit value setting table corresponding to the probability setting value (step A381)
Alternatively, in the process of setting the small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability setting value (step A401), if the value indicating the referred probability setting value is an abnormal value such as not corresponding to any probability setting value, The setting may be performed with a predetermined probability setting value (for example, setting 1), or the game may be stopped and an error may be notified when an abnormality occurs. Further, although the probability setting value is referred to for each big hit judgment and each small hit judgment, when setting the probability set value in the probability set value changing state, the upper limit value setting table corresponding to the set probability set value It is also possible to perform a process of setting a small hit upper limit judgment value and only refer to this when making a big hit judgment or a small hit judgment.

[Processing during fluctuation of special map]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the special figure variation process, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag (special figure 1 variation flag or special figure 2 variation flag) is prepared (step A
601), effect command setting processing is performed (step A602). That is, the symbol stop command forming stop information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as the variation time of the special figure variation display game being executed ends and the result is derived and displayed. In the production control device 300,
Upon receipt of this symbol stop command, the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is stopped and the result is stopped and displayed.

Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of the present embodiment, the display time is set to 600 msec regardless of whether the stop symbol pattern is out of alignment, the big hit symbol pattern, or the small hit symbol pattern, but the display time may be different depending on the stop symbol pattern. .. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Next, the process number "2" relating to the process during special figure display is set as the process number (step A6).
05), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A606).

Next, the signal regarding the fluctuation end of special figure 1 (for example, turning off the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal) in the test signal output data area (step A607), the signal regarding fluctuation end of special figure 2 (for example, special symbol) 2 Turn OFF the changing signal) in the test signal output data area (step A608), and the control timer initial in the symbol determination number signal control timer area related to the number of times the special figure variation display game for output to the external information terminal is executed. The value (for example, 256 msec) is saved (step A609). After that, as the information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51, the stop flag related to the variation stop on the special figure 1 display device 51 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area (step A610). ), as a control information of the special figure 2 variation display game on the special figure 2 display device 52, a stop flag related to a variation stop on the special figure 2 display device 52 is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area (step A611), and the special figure changing process is ended.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, details of the special figure displaying process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, in the special figure displaying process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM's Processing for clearing the small hit flag area (step A702) is performed.
Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 change start process are loaded. (Step A703), processing of clearing the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM (step A704). Then, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A705), and it is a big hit (step A70).
5; Y), a test signal (for example, a condition device operating signal is turned on, a character continuously operating device operating signal is turned on, which is related to the start of the big hit of the second special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 2 big hit),
The special symbol 2 signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708), and the round number upper limit value table is set (step A709).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the jackpot flag 2 is not the jackpot (step A705; N), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot ((
If it is determined that the jackpot is the big hit (step A706; Y), a test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the accessory device is ON, and the accessory character is ON) regarding the start of the big jackpot (the special jackpot 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game. Signal is ON during continuous operation device operation, signal per special symbol is ON) RW
The data is saved in the M test signal output data area (step A707), and the processing for setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709) is performed.

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (“16” or “4” in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the RWM is obtained. The number of rounds is saved in the round upper limit value area (step A710). Next, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the round LE of the RWM is obtained.
The data is saved in the D pointer area (step A711).

Next, the decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop design pattern is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and the effect command setting processing (step A71).
Perform 3). After that, a probability information command related to the information that sets the probability of a hit result in the ordinary figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Continuously, the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process
The fanfare command corresponding to is prepared (step A716), and effect command setting processing (step A717) is performed. This fanfare command forms the special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Next, the special winning opening opening information and a signal corresponding to the state of the probability of being a winning result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A718, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as the signals corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the probability state. Each ON/OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is O when the jackpot is a jackpot with a payout (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1).
N, big hit without payout (so-called sudden big hit, etc. Big winning opening information is big winning opening information 1
), it is turned on during a big hit during the time saving state, and turned off otherwise.
The big hit 3 signal is ON when the big hit is a big hit and is OFF when the big hit is a big hit.

After that, the big winning fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 470 m) corresponding to the state of the winning probability opening information and the probability of a winning result in the ordinary figure changing display game and the special figure changing display game.
0 ms, 7700 ms or 300 ms) is set (step A719), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720).
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and the time saving state of the special figure when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, the special winning opening fraudulent winning number area of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) corresponding to the special opening opening information is cleared (step A722), and the big winning opening corresponding to the special opening opening information is awarded. The fraud monitoring period outside flag is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area (step A72).
3). After that, the fanfare/fanfare/
In-interval process shift setting process 1 (step A724) is performed, and the special figure displaying process is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 converts the special variation winning device 38 to the open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game. It constitutes a special game state generating means for generating a state.

On the other hand, in step A706, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A706
N) determines whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
When it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A72).
5; Y), a high-probability-variation-number update process (step of updating the value (high-probability-variation number) in the high-probability-variation-number region for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in a high-probability state (step). A
726), the production mode information check process regarding the production mode setting (step A727).
To determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A
728).

When it is determined in step A728 that the probability of the special map is not high (step A728; N
), load the decoration special drawing command from the decoration special drawing command area and prepare (Step A
729) and effect command setting processing (step A730). Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), and the effect command setting process (step A73).
2) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733. This small hit fanfare command also forms special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

If it is determined in step A728 that the probability of the special figure is high (step A72
8; Y), the process proceeds to step A733. Thus, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment
In 0, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but in order not to make the player aware of the occurrence of the small hit, The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). Next, as the processing number, "7" relating to the small hit fanfare processing is set (step A734), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A735).

Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A736), and a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, one big hit signal is output (big hit + small hit is output. )) in the external information output data area (step A)
737), a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A738).

Next, the special winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step A739), and the fraud monitoring outside-period flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A740).
Next, a signal relating to a right-handed instruction (turning on the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A741), and the indicator LED (for example, the first gaming state display portion 57) during right-handed driving is turned on. Therefore, the number in the right hit state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A742), and the special figure displaying process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not the small hit (step A725; N), the number of high-probability fluctuations for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the high-probability state is high. High-probability fluctuation number update processing (step A743) for updating the value of the area (high-probability fluctuation number), and effect mode information check processing (step A7) regarding effect mode setting.
44) to set the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation corresponding to the effect mode number (step A7).
45), it is determined whether or not the effect remaining rotational speed and the switching preparation remaining rotational speed match (step A7).
46). The remaining rotation speed for switching preparation may be a different value (rotation speed) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes, or may be the same value in any of the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes. It may be (rotation speed), or may be the same value (rotation speed) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes.
When it is determined in step A746 that the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed do not match (step A746; N), "0" relating to special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A749). ), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A750), and the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A751). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special winning hole fraud monitoring period flag area (step A752).
), the special figure displaying process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step A746, when it is determined that the effect remaining rotation speed and the switch preparation remaining rotation speed match (step A746; Y), the effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A747), and the effect command setting is performed. After performing the process (step A748), the process proceeds to step A749. The production mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing prefetch production from being performed a few rotations before the production mode is switched. By transmitting the production mode switching preparation command to the production control device 300, production is performed across modes. It is possible to prevent contradictions from occurring.

[Public game processing]
Next, details of the universal figure game process (step S113) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the public figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process relating to the general figure variable display game is controlled, the display of the general figure is set, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 25, in the universal figure game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a (step B1) is performed, and a universal electric prize switch for monitoring the input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the universal figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the universal figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the universal figure game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

When the value of the universal figure game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has expired or has already expired, it is referred to branch to the process corresponding to the universal figure game process number. A process of setting the general-purpose game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and a process of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the general-purpose game process number is performed using the table (step B6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the universal figure game processing number (step B7).

In step B7, if the general figure game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the general figure variation display game is monitored, and the setting of variation start and effect setting of the general figure variation display game and the variation of general figure are in progress. An ordinary figure ordinary process (step B8) for setting information necessary for the process is performed.
If the figure game process number is "1" at step B7, a figure figure changing process (step B9) is performed to set information necessary for performing the figure image displaying process.

In step B7, if the universal figure game processing number is "2", and if the result of the universal figure variable display game is a hit, the universal battery open time is set according to whether or not the state is in a time saving state. Alternatively, the processing for displaying a general figure (step B10) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the processing for a general figure.
Further, in step B7, if the universal figure game processing number is "3", the processing during the universal figure hitting is continued, or the information necessary for performing the routine electric ball remaining ball processing is set, etc. The process (step B11) is performed.

If the universal figure game process number is "4" at step B7, the ordinary electric ball remaining process (step B12) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the universal figure end process.
Further, in step B7, when the figure/universal figure game processing number is "5", the per-universal-university-person ending processing (step B13) for setting information necessary for performing the figure/universal figure ordinary processing is executed.

After that, after preparing the universal figure fluctuation control table for controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal figure indicator (step B14), the symbol variation control processing which relates to the control of variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal figure indicator 53 (step B15) is performed, and the ordinary figure game process is ended.
On the other hand, in step B4, the value of the universal figure game processing timer is not "0" (step B4;
N), that is, if it is determined that the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Usually processed normally]
Next, details of the ordinary figure ordinary process (step B8) in the above-mentioned ordinary figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the normal/universal figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal/universal figure reservation number is “0” (step B301). When the normal/universal figure reservation number is “0” (step B301; Y )
Sets "0" related to the ordinary figure normal process as the process number (step B322), and saves the process number in the universal figure game process number area (step B323). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud monitoring fraud monitoring period flag area (step B324), and the ordinary figure normal process ends.

In addition, when the general figure reservation number is not “0” (step B301; N), the random number is stored from the RWM per random number storage area (for reservation number 1), per symbol random number storage area (for reservation number 1), The loaded area, that is, the hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) are cleared to 0 (step B302), and the probability of a hit result in the universal figure variation display game is It is determined whether or not the probability that the figure is higher than the normal probability (that is, the probability that the figure is low) is high, that is, the state is in a time saving state (step B303).

If it is not during the high probability of the general figure (step B303; N), the lower limit judgment value at the low probability of the normal figure (low probability lower limit judgment value) is set (step B304), and it is during the high probability of the general figure (step B303).
303; Y) sets the lower limit judgment value (high probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of high probability of universal figure (step B305).
After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit judgment value (step B306). When the value of the hit random number is not equal to or higher than the upper limit judgment value (step B306; N), the value of the hit random number is step B304 or B305. It is determined whether it is less than the lower limit judgment value set in step (step B
307).

When the value of the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (step B306; Y), or when the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B304 or B305 (step B3
07; Y) saves the deviation information in the hit flag area (step B308), sets the deviation stop symbol number (step B309), and saves the deviation symbol information in the general figure stop symbol information area (step B310). , The stop symbol number is saved in the universal symbol stop symbol area (step B314).
On the other hand, when the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B
311), the hit stop symbol number corresponding to the hit symbol random number loaded in step B302 is set (step B312), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (step B313). ), the stop symbol number is saved in the universal symbol stop symbol area (step B314).

In the case of the present embodiment, the probability of hitting at the time of low probability of universal figure is 0/251, the probability of hitting at the time of high probability of universal figure is 250/251, the upper limit judgment value is “251”, and the lower probability lower limit judgment value is “251” and the high probability lower limit determination value are “1”. Therefore, at the time of low probability of universal figure, there is a deviation when the value of the random number per hit is "0" to "250". Further, at the time of high probability of universal figure, the case where the value of the random number per hit is any of "1" to "250" is a hit, and the case where the value of the random number per hit is "0" is out of range.
In the case of the present embodiment, there are two types of winning symbols.

After saving the stop symbol number in the universal symbol stop symbol area (step B314), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B315).
After that, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B316), and the empty area after the shift is set to 0.
It is cleared (step B317), and the number of universal figure reservations is updated by -1 (step B318). That is, with the execution of the universal figure fluctuation display game for the oldest universal figure hold number 1, a process of moving up the ranks of the universal figure hold numbers 2 to 4 which are on hold after the regular figure hold number 1 one by one. I do. By this process, the values for the number of reserved figures of 2 for public figures in the random number storage area per general figure to the number of retained figures of 4 for general figures are moved from the number of reserved figures of 1 for general figures in the random number storage area for one figure to 3 for the number of retained figures Will be done.
Then, the value for the number of reserved universal figures of 4 in the random number storage area per universal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved universal figures is decremented by one.

Next, the variation pattern random number 3 is extracted (step B319), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3 is set, and the variation time is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B3).
20). Then, the general figure changing process shift setting process (step B321) for shifting to the general figure changing process is performed, and the ordinary figure normal process ends. That is, the game control device 100 executes the universal figure variation display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball in the universal figure starting gate 34 (inflow region) (based on the regular figure starting memory). Make up.
In the case of the present embodiment, in step B320, the fluctuation time is set to 500 msec with a probability of 200/256, 1500 msec with a probability of 40/256, and 3000 msec with a probability of 16/256. ..

[Processing during fluctuations in general figure]
Next, details of the routine figure changing process (step B9) in the aforementioned routine figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the routine figure changing process, first, the process number is set to "2" relating to the routine figure displaying process (step B401), and the process number is saved in the routine figure game process number area. (Step B402). After that, the general figure display time (for example, 600 msec), which is the display time of the result of the general figure change display game on the general figure display 53, is saved in the general figure game processing timer area (step B403), and the change of the general figure is ended. Save the signal (for example, turn OFF the signal during normal symbol 1) in the test signal output data area (step B404),
A stop flag indicating that the universal figure variation display game is stopped is saved in the universal figure variation control flag area (step B405), and the universal figure variation processing is ended.

[Processing during normal display]
Next, details of the general figure displaying process (step B10) in the above general figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 28, in the normal figure displaying process, first, the hit flag (hit information or off information) set in the normal figure normal process is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

When the hit flag is not hit information (step B503; N), "0" which is related to the ordinary figure normal process is set as the process number (step B515), and the process number is saved in the ordinary figure game process number area (step). B516). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the process of displaying the universal figure is ended.

On the other hand, if the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), the hitting process setting table is set (step B504), and the value of the hit start pointer (for example, "0" Or "5") is acquired and saved in the control pointer area in the normal figure (step B505). Next, the value of the hit end pointer ((
For example, "4" or "7") is acquired and saved in the end pointer area per universal figure (step B506). Next, the universal communication opening time (for example, 1700m) corresponding to the universal pattern stop symbol information
Second or 2600 ms) is acquired and saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B5).
07).

Next, "3" is set as the process number for shifting to the ordinary figure hit medium process (step B
508) and save the processing number in the universal figure game processing number area (step B509).
After that, a signal related to the start of the general figure variation display game (for example, the normal symbol 1 hitting signal is ON) and a signal related to the start of the normal electric operation (for example, the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal is ON) are test signals. The data is saved in the output data area (step B510) and a signal for driving (turning on) the general electric solenoid is output, so the on data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B511).

Further, the information of the Poden count number area that stores the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is cleared (step B512), and the number of winnings to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 during the regular electricity fraud monitoring period is stored in Hoden. The information in the fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step B513). Then, a flag (outside fraud monitoring period flag) that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the ordinary electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B514), and the processing for displaying the universal figure ends.

[Usually hit processing]
Next, details of the during-universal-game hitting process (step B11) in the above-described general-universal-drawing game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the processing for hitting a universal figure, first, a control pointer for hitting a universal figure is loaded and prepared (step B601). It is determined (step B602).

Then, when the value of the control pointer in the normal figure is not greater than or equal to the upper limit value (step B602; N
) Performs the +1 update of the control pointer during normal drawing (step B603), and performs a branching process according to the value of the control pointer during normal drawing (value before +1 is updated in step B603) (step B604).
In addition, when the value of the control pointer during normal drawing is equal to or larger than the upper limit value (step B602; Y)
Performs branch processing according to the value of the control pointer during normal drawing (step B604), without performing the processing of updating the processing control pointer area during normal drawing by +1 in step B603.

If the value of the control pointer is "0", "2", or "5", the process proceeds to step B605 to control the closing of the normal variable winning device 37, and thus the normal variable winning device corresponding to the control pointer. The wait time after blockage of 37 is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B605), and the OFF data is saved in the universal electric solenoid output data area to turn off the ordinary electric solenoid 37c (step B606). The process in FIG.

If the value of the control pointer is "1" or "3", the process proceeds to step B607 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, and thus the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is operated. The normal electric opening time, which is the opening time, is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B607), and the ON data is saved in the normal electric solenoid output data area to turn on the normal electric solenoid 37c (step B608). The process is completed.

If the value of the control pointer is "6", the process proceeds to step B609 to control the opening of the normal variation winning device 37, and thus the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is opened.
Save the opening time of the normal electric car, which is the opening time of the game, in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B60).
9) In order to turn on the ordinary electric solenoid 37c, the on data is saved in the ordinary electric solenoid output data area (step B610), and the ordinary figure hitting process is terminated.

If the value of the control pointer is "4" or "7", the process proceeds to step B611, the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 is terminated, and the normal ball remaining ball process is performed. Is set to "4" (step B611). Then, this processing number is saved in the universal figure game processing number area (step B612), and the ordinary electric ball remaining processing time is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B613). After that, in order to turn off the general-purpose solenoid 37c, the off-data is saved in the general-purpose solenoid output data area (step B614), and the general-purpose hitting process is ended.

Here, in this embodiment, for example, the wait time is 300 m in step B605.
Seconds, in step B607 it is 1700 msec as the normal battery opening time, in step B609 it is 2600 msec as the normal battery opening time, and in step B613 it is 6 as the normal battery remaining ball processing time.
Save 00 ms.
Further, when the universal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 1", "0" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the routine figure displaying process shown in FIG. In step B506, "4" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the processing for displaying the universal map, "1700 msec" is acquired as the universal communication opening time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec has passed, the normal call release time is "1700 msec", so the normal call is released for 1700 msec. The time is set, and then the control pointer is updated to "1" during the public figure, so the general electric train opens for 1700 msec, and then the control pointer during the general figure hits "2".
The wait time of 300 msec is set for updating to, and then the control pointer for POD is released for 1700 msec because the control pointer is updated to "3". Since it is updated to ", the processing time of the remaining electric ball of Poden of 600 msec is set.

Further, when the universal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 2", "5" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the routine figure displaying process shown in FIG. In step B506, "7" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the processing for displaying the universal map, "2600 msec" is acquired as the universal communication opening time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec elapses, the normal call open time is "2600 msec", so the normal call opens for 2600 msec. The time is set, and then the control pointer is updated to "6" during the public figure, so that the Poden opens for 2600 msec. Then, the control pointer is updated to "7" during the public figure for 600 msec. Poden remaining ball processing time is set. That is, the game control means 100 executes the general figure game (general figure variation display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the general figure game is a specific result, the ordinary variation winning device 37 is opened. It constitutes a normal variable winning device control means capable of generating a hit state (universal figure hit state) to be converted.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S117) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the external information edit processing, payout command transmission processing (step S111)
, Winning a prize switch/state monitoring process (step S107), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S107)
115), based on the monitoring result in the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S116), information to be output to an external device such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement center internal management device or a test shooting test device is created and set in an output buffer. Perform processing, etc.

As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, in the external information editing process, first, when the glass frame opening error is not occurring (step S801; N) and the main frame opening error is not occurring (step S802; N), , OFF data of the door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), OFF data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. ..
On the other hand, if the glass frame opening error is occurring (step S801; Y), or
When the main body frame opening error is occurring (step S802; Y), the ON data of the door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S805), and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is stored. The data is saved in the test signal output data area (step S806), and the process proceeds to step S807.

If the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not "0", it is updated by -1 ( Step S807). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the RAM initial value is set when the RAM is started by clearing the RAM in the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808).
When the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S808; N), that is, when the time has not expired, the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S809), and step S810. Process shifts to. Also,
When the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the process of step S809 is not performed and the process proceeds to step S810. ..

Then, when the magnet illegality is occurring (step S810; Y), when the board electric wave irregularity is occurring (step S811; Y), and when the frame electric wave irregularity is occurring (step S81).
2) Y), when the illegal call is occurring (step S813; Y), or when the special winning opening is occurring (step S814; Y), the ON data of the security signal is output as external information. The data is saved in the data area (step S817), the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S818), and step S819.
Process shifts to. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

On the other hand, neither the occurrence of magnet fraud (step S810; N), the occurrence of board radio fraud (step S811; N), nor the occurrence of frame radio fraud (step S812; N).
If it is not in the middle of the normal electric wire fraud (step S813; N) and is not in the middle of special winning opening (step S814; N), it is determined whether the switch abnormality is occurring (step S815).
When the switch abnormality is occurring (step S815; Y), ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S818), and the process proceeds to step S819. If no switch abnormality is occurring (step S815)
; N), OFF data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S816), and the process proceeds to step S819.

Then, a main prize ball signal editing process (step S819) for setting information on the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a starting opening signal editing process for editing the winning signal of the starting opening (step S820).
)I do.
Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information relating to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step S821). The minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol fixed number control timer is "0" (step S822).

When the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is "0" (step S822; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the OFF data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area. Then (step S823), the external information editing process ends.
If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not "0" (step S822; N), that is, if the time is not up, the ON data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S822). (S824), the external information editing process ends.

Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the performance control device 300 performs a main process shown in FIG. 32 and a timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3) and the interrupt is permitted (step C4). Then, the generation of display data is permitted (step C
5) The random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7 is performed, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, an effect button input process (step C9) of creating input information from the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The reading of the input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed in the timer interrupt process, and in the effect button input process, when the input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is made, the process of changing the effect content is performed.

Then, the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal is set, and the LED by the player is set.
Hall/player setting mode processing for accepting operations such as change of brightness of liquid crystal and liquid crystal, volume is performed (step C10). Next, a random number updating process (step C11) of updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, a received command check process (step C12) that analyzes and responds to the command from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display edit process (step C13) that edits settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect. ) To set the preparation end of the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 0 seconds (about 33.3 ms) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, since a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 second) is created, a V blank interrupt (1/6)
When 0 second) is entered twice, it is determined that it is the frame switching timing. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frame switching in later than 1/60 seconds. May be switched). When it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), LED control of the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, the sub information display device 90, and the like. The decoration control process (step C18) to be performed, the movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and the solenoid of the board effect device 44 are performed,
The process returns to the process of clearing WDT (step C8).

[Reception command check processing]
FIG. 33 shows the received command check process in the main process described above. In this reception command check processing, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) is loaded as the command reception number (
(Step C201), it is determined whether the number of received commands is not 0 (Step C202).
.. Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check processing ends. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Then, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204
), the command read index is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether or not the copying of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C206).
As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer,
The contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. As a result, the command (data) is prepared in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command.
Can be moved to make room. In addition, the command analysis can be collectively performed in the main processing cycle unit.

If it is determined in step C206 that copying of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. Further, when it is determined that the copying of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and received command analysis processing (step C208) is performed.

Then, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N),
It returns to the process of step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing is ended. In this way, in the received command check processing, the commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) are analyzed together. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Reception command analysis processing]
FIG. 34 shows the received command analysis process in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis processing, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). MODE and A
When it is determined that the CT is within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y)
, It is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C23).
4).

When it is determined in steps C232 and C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C232; C2
34; N), the received command analysis processing ends.

When it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (
In step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the variable system command (step C235). The fluctuation system command is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable system command (step C235
;; Y), the variable system command process (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of the variable system command (
In Step C235; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the big hit system command (Step C237). The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) related to a big hit mid production, or a command for operation related to a small hit mid effect (display of a fanfare screen or an end screen, etc.). And MO
When it is determined that the DE is within the range of the big hit type command (step C237; Y), the big hit type command process (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

When it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the big hit type command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol type command (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for instructing information regarding the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special symbol). Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the symbol type command (step C239; Y), the symbol type command process (
Step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol-related commands ((
In step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of a single-shot system command such as a hold number command or an error command (step C241). The single-shot type command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense in combination like a symbol command and a variable type command. This one-shot system command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information system command, an error/illegal system command, a model designation command, and the like. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single-shot type command (step C24)
1; Y), the single-shot system command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of the single-shot command ((
In step C241; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the prefetch symbol type command (step C243). When MODE is determined to be in the range of the prefetch symbol system command (step C243; Y), the prefetch symbol system command process (step C2)
44) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

Further, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the prefetch variable system command (step C245). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetching variable system command (step C245; Y), the prefetching variable system command process (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended. Also, in step C245,
When it is determined that the MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation type command (step C245; N)
Ends the received command analysis processing.

The look-ahead variation system command and the look-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The pre-reading effect (also referred to as the pre-reading notice or the pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure variation display game corresponding to the starting memory (hold) for which the special figure variation display game is not executed is a big hit when it is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance (or what kind of variation pattern) with a predetermined degree of reliability, the decoration special figure starting memory display or the like displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a manner different from usual, or the display device 41. It is an effect such as performing an effect display. And the pre-reading system command (pre-reading variation system command and pre-reading pattern system command) is the command which notifies beforehand the fluctuation pattern and the stop design which correspond to the starting memory which becomes the target of pre-reading production, from game control control equipment 100 when starting winning It is transmitted to the performance control device 300. Note that normal variable-based commands and symbol-based commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variable display.

Further, with respect to a command related to power-on and a command related to a probability setting value, a corresponding process is performed by a single-shot system command process. Examples of commands related to power-on include commands for power failure recovery and commands for RAM initialization. Examples of the command relating to the probability setting value include commands for changing probability setting, changing probability setting value, ending probability setting change, checking probability setting value, and ending confirmation of probability setting value.

In the first embodiment described above, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on, the mode is changed to the probability set value confirmation mode. However, the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on. Even in this case, the state may be changed to the probability setting value change state. However, since the RAM is initialized with the end of the probability setting value changing state, it is executed during the special figure variation display game, the general figure variation display game, the special game state, or the general figure hit state. It may be a condition that does not correspond to. Further, it may be on condition that the customer is in a waiting state. Further, when the operation handle 24 is operated and there is an input from the touch switch, the probability setting value change state may not be set.

In addition, although it has been stated that the RAM 111C is initialized when the probability setting value change state ends,
The RAM 111C may not be initialized unless it is determined that the data in the M111C is abnormal.

Although the probability values corresponding to the respective probability setting values are different, the same probability value may be assigned to different probability setting values. FIG. 35A shows probability setting values in this embodiment. The value of the probability setting value area of the RAM 111C takes a value of 0-5. The work probability setting value region is also the same. Settings 1 to 6 are assigned as probability setting values corresponding to the values in the probability setting value area. The probability setting value display device 153 displays 1 to 6 corresponding to the value of the probability setting value. Different probability values are assigned to the probability values in the settings 1 to 6.

FIG. 35B shows an example in which the allocation of probability values is different. In this example, the probability values of setting 1 to setting 3 are assigned as setting 4 to setting 6. Therefore, it is possible to switch the probability values in three steps. Other than this, it is similar to FIG. By doing so, if the six-step probability values are unnecessary, only the probability values need to be different, and the design can be easily changed.

Note that which probability setting value is assigned to which probability value is arbitrary. For example, setting 1 and setting 6, setting 2 and setting 5, and setting 3 and setting 4 may be the same probability value. Since the value of the probability setting value area (working probability setting value area) is updated by +1 by operating the setting value changing button, the order of the probability values that change when the setting value changing button is operated by changing the allocation is different. In order. Further, for example, if the same probability value as the other probability setting values is assigned to the two probability setting values, then there are four stages of change, and any one of the first to sixth stages.

FIG. 35C also shows an example in which the allocation of probability values is different. In this example, FIG.
The settings 4 to 6 in Step 1 are set to settings 1 to 3, and the probability set value display device 153 is displayed.
The display in 3 is also set to 1 to 3 corresponding to this. As a result, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 and the probability value correspond to each other, and it is possible for an operator in charge of work to easily understand the probability value.

FIG. 35D also shows an example in which the probability values are assigned differently. In this example, all the settings are 1, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is all 1, and the probability values are all the same. That is, substantially only one probability value can be set, and even if the function of changing the probability value is unnecessary, it is possible to deal with it by setting the value without changing the configuration of the game control device 100. In this case, even if the set value change button is operated, the same display is displayed on the probability set value display device 153, but the operation is performed by performing the specific display (for example, blank display) as described above. It will be easier for the worker to understand that it has been accepted.

Although the number of values in the probability setting value area is 6, the number may be other than this. For example, in the case of FIGS. 35B and 35C, the number of values in the probability setting value region may be three. Further, in the case of FIG. 35D, the number of values in the probability setting value area may be one. Further, the number of values in the probability setting value region may be set to 7 or more in order to be able to set a larger number of steps. Although the probability setting value to which the probability value is assigned is selected, the probability value may be selected. In this case, the probability setting value display device 153 displays the selected probability value.

Also, although the big hit probability value is assigned according to the probability setting value, the small hit probability value is also assigned, and the small hit probability value is also changed according to the change of the probability setting value. ing. The big hit probability value and the small hit probability value corresponding to each probability setting value can be independently determined. However, when only the big hits and the small hits are obtained as a result of the special figure variation display game, it is necessary to set the probability value of the small hits according to the probability value of the big hits. Further, the probability setting value for setting the probability value of the big hit and the probability setting value for setting the probability value of the small hit may be set separately. Further, the probability value of the small hit may be a constant value regardless of the probability setting value. Further, the probability of a hit result of the universal figure variation display game may be set according to a probability setting value that defines a probability value of a big hit, or may be set independently.

Further, when the setting value change button, the setting key operation unit, the probability setting value display device 153, etc. are provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100, when the function for changing the probability value is unnecessary. In this case, the setting sub-board may be removed, and the connection section of the game control device 100 with the setting sub-board may be connected to a sub-board that has been subjected to termination processing such as GND connection. By doing so, only the function of changing the probability value can be eliminated without changing the configuration of the game control device 100, and the cost can be reduced. In addition, in a gaming machine that does not have a probability varying function, the operation probability M may be provided for each probability setting value.

[First Modification]
Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the game control device 100 transmits a command instructing the payout to the payout control device 200 when the power is turned on.

The payout control device 200 in the present modified example includes a storage unit capable of holding the stored contents even when the power is off. This storage means is configured to store the information of the payout command received from the game control device 100, and to pay out based on the information stored here. In this way, the storage means of the payout control device 200 can hold the stored contents in the power-off state, so that the game control device 100 sequentially sends the payout commands regardless of the state of the payout busy signal. .. Therefore, the information of the unpaid payout command is stored in the storage means of the payout control device 200.

[Main processing]
The gaming machine of the present modification performs the main processing shown in FIG. 36 instead of the main processing shown in FIG. In this process, when the command (specific information) of the setting change instruction is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28), the command (specific information) of the payout instruction is transmitted to the payout control device 200. (Step S81). Payout control device 2
At 00, upon receipt of this payout instruction command, the payout is started based on the information backed up in its own storage means. By doing so, even if the backup data of the game control device 100 is damaged, the payout can be made based on the information stored in the payout control device 200, and the profit for the player is prevented from being impaired. it can.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the command of the setting change instruction, in addition to the notification of prompting the change of the probability setting value, the notification that the payout may be performed may be performed. May be. In addition, the command (specific information) of the payout instruction is transmitted to the payout control device 200, not limited to the above case. For example, in the case of transmitting the command whose probability setting is being changed to the effect control device 300 in FIG. S40) and also when the command for RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (step S44), the payout control device 20
A payout command (specific information) may be transmitted to 0.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to a player The game control means (game control device 100) for controlling, the production control means (production control device 300) for controlling the production of the game, and the probability value used for the lottery of the game are assigned based on the information from the game control means. A setting means that makes it possible to select the obtained probability setting value from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) Based on the payout information from the game control device 100) and the game control device, the payout control device (payout control device 20) for controlling the payout of the game medium.
0) and, the game control means, the memory means (R
AM111C), the validity determination means (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on, and the operation of the operation unit for selecting the probability setting value. Based on the initialization means (game control device 100) capable of initializing the storage means, and when the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid, it is specified. The information is transmitted to the effect control means and the payout control means to stop the control of the game, the effect control means issues a notification prompting the selection of the probability setting value based on the reception of the specific information, and the payout control means is the power source. The payout information storage means capable of holding the stored contents even in the cutoff state and capable of storing the payout information received from the game control means, and when the specific information is received, based on the payout information stored in the payout information storage means, the game medium. It means that the payout control is performed.
Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state and prevent the profit obtained by the player from being impaired. Further, by initializing the RAM 111C, the probability setting value information set in the game store is also lost and the initial value is set, but by initializing the notification by prompting the selection of the probability setting value, By this, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value which is not intended by the gaming shop from being left set.

[Second Modification]
Next, a second modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification is provided with a plurality of conditions for determining the selected probability setting value.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 37 is performed instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value changing process, a confirmation condition monitoring process (step S450) for monitoring whether or not a condition for confirming the selected probability setting value is satisfied is performed.

[Fixed condition monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 38, in the definite condition monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (step S411), and if there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y). ) Clears the end standby flag (step S45).
7), the processing of steps S412 to S415 is performed, and the definite condition monitoring processing ends.

That is, when the worker performs the first operation of touching the operation handle 24, the first confirming condition based on the input from the touch switch is satisfied, and the selected probability setting value is set. The end standby flag is a flag used to monitor the establishment of the second confirmation condition, as will be described later. Here, the second confirmation condition is satisfied because the first confirmation condition based on the input from the touch switch is satisfied. Since it is no longer necessary to monitor, the end wait flag is cleared.

On the other hand, if there is no input from the touch switch (step S411; N), that is, if the first confirmation condition is not satisfied, it is determined whether there is an end standby flag (step S451).
). If there is an end standby flag (step S451; Y), the process proceeds to step S455. In this case, monitoring of the second definite condition has already started. If there is no end standby flag (step S451; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the off state (step S452).

When the setting key switch is not in the off state (step S452; N), the fixed condition monitoring process ends. In this case, the probability setting value changing state continues. Further, when the setting key switch is in the off state (step S452; Y), the initial value (for example, 3) is set in the change end timer area.
Seconds) is saved (step S453), and the end standby flag is set (step S454).
).

Then, if the change end timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S455), and it is determined whether the change end timer is 0 (step S456). When the change end timer is not 0 (step S456; N), the fixed condition monitoring process ends. If the change end timer is 0 (step S456; Y), the processing from step S457 onward is performed, and the finalized condition monitoring processing ends. That is, the second confirmation condition is satisfied when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the operation of turning off the setting key switch which is the second operation is performed, and the selected probability setting value is set. It has become so.

As described above, in the present modification, the probability setting value selected when either the first confirming condition or the second confirming condition is satisfied is set as the probability setting value used in the game.
Until these confirmation conditions are satisfied, the selected probability setting value is stored in the working probability setting value area, and the information in the probability setting value area in which the probability setting value used in the game is stored has been changed. Absent. Therefore, if the power is shut off before the confirmation condition is satisfied, the selected probability setting value is discarded and the original probability setting value is set.

In the probability setting value changing state, it may be notified that the probability setting value selected by touching the operation handle 24 is set. This notification may be always performed in the probability setting value changing state, or may be performed only in the state in which the end standby flag is set. Further, the first confirmation condition and the second confirmation condition are not limited to the above-mentioned conditions and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the second confirmation condition may be only that the setting key switch is in the off state. Alternatively, the probability setting value selected may be set when three or more definite conditions are prepared and any one of them is satisfied.

Further, although it is assumed that the original probability setting value is set when the power is cut off before the confirmation condition is satisfied, a predetermined probability setting value may be set. For example, when the probability setting value change state is started, the information of the probability setting value area is set to an initial value (for example, setting 1), and when the power is cut off before the confirmation condition is satisfied, this initial value is set. May be set. The initial value in this case can be set to an arbitrary probability setting value in advance. For example, the same probability setting value as the probability setting value set when the area for the probability setting value of the RAM 111C is initialized. It may be set value.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to a player The control unit (game control device 100) for controlling, and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned, the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152),
A setting means (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)), and the setting means is one of a plurality of confirmation conditions. It means that the probability setting value selected is set based on the fact that either of the conditions is established. Therefore, the probability setting value can be surely changed. Further, by providing a plurality of confirmation conditions, the degree of freedom of work can be increased, and the work efficiency at the game store can be improved.

In addition, the setting means, when the power is cut off before any of the plurality of definite conditions is satisfied,
This means that the selected probability setting value is not set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed unintentionally.

Further, the plurality of finalizing conditions include a first finalizing condition and a second finalizing condition, the first finalizing condition is that a predetermined first operation is performed, and the second finalizing condition is the first operation. Means that a predetermined time elapses after a different predetermined second operation is performed. Therefore, the probability setting value can be surely changed.

[Third Modification]
Next, a third modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. The gaming machine of the present modification does not include a setting key operation unit in the setting means, and the setting key switch 152 is not provided. In addition, the transition condition to the changeable state in which the probability setting value can be changed is different.

[Main processing]
The gaming machine of the present modification performs the main processing shown in FIG. 39 instead of the main processing shown in FIG. In this process, if the backed up information is normal and the probability setting value change state is not set (step S21; N), is the setting value change switch turned on from the previously read state of the third input port 124? Is determined (step S61).

If the set value change switch is not in the on state (step S61; N), the process proceeds to step S30 in FIG. 6 to perform the process when the power failure is normally restored. If the set value change switch is in the on state (step S61; Y), the shift determination process is performed (step S62). As will be described later, in the transition determination processing, it is determined whether the transition condition to the probability setting value changing state is satisfied, and if the transition condition is satisfied, the probability setting value changing flag is set. ..

If the probability setting value changing flag is set in the shift determination processing (step S63; Y), the process for initializing the RAM and changing the setting value to the probability setting value changing state The process moves to step S35 of 6. In this modification, since the probability setting value changing flag is set in the transition determination process, the process of step S37 may not be performed. Further, when the probability setting value changing flag is not set in the shift determination process (step S63; N)
Shifts to step S41 of FIG. 6 in order to perform the initialization processing of the RAM area for game control.

On the other hand, when the backed up information is not normal, the RAM clear start address 1
After setting (step S25), it is determined from the previously read state of the third input port 124 whether the set value change switch is in the on state (step S64). If the setting value change switch is not in the ON state (step S64; N), a setting change command (specific information)
Is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S28), RAM access is prohibited (step S29), control is stopped, and power-off of the gaming machine is awaited.

If the set value change switch is in the on state (step S64; Y), the shift determination process is performed (step S65). This shift determination process is the same process as step S62.
When the probability setting value changing flag is set in the transition determination process (step S66; Y),
In order to perform the initialization process of the RAM and the process of changing the probability setting value to the probability setting value changing state, the process proceeds to step S35 of FIG. When the probability setting value changing flag is not set in the shift determination process (step S66; N), the process proceeds to step S27.

[Transition determination process]
FIG. 40 shows the shift determination processing (steps S62 and S65) in the above-mentioned main processing. In this transition determination process, first, an initial value (for example, 30 seconds) is saved in the transition standby timer area (step S71), the state of the input port 1 is read (step S72), and it is determined whether the transition condition is satisfied (step S72). Step S73).

In this modified example, a staff member can shift to a probability set value changing state by inserting game balls into the winning area in a predetermined order within a predetermined time, and the winning area provided in the gaming area 32. The state of the input port 1 to which the detection signal from is input determines whether or not this transition condition is satisfied. When this transition condition is satisfied (step S73; Y),
The probability setting value changing flag is set (step S76), and the shift determination process ends. As a result, the state is changed to the probability setting value change state.

When the transition condition is not satisfied (step S73; N), the transition standby timer is set to 0.
If not, -1 is updated (step S74), and it is determined whether the shift waiting timer is 0 (step S75). Then, when the shift standby timer is not 0 (step S75; N), the process returns to step S72. That is, the detection signal from the winning area is monitored for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

If the shift standby timer is 0 (step S75; Y), the shift determination process ends. That is, when the transition condition is not satisfied within the predetermined time, the transition determination process is terminated without setting the probability setting value changing flag. As a result, in the case where the backed up data is normal, in order to perform the initialization process of the RAM area for game control, step S of FIG.
41, and if the backed up data is abnormal, step S
28 and S29 are performed and the control is stopped.

The transition condition may or may not be changeable at the game shop. Further, the transition condition is to put the game balls in the winning area in a predetermined order, but it is also possible to put a predetermined number of game balls in the predetermined winning area in any order. Further, a predetermined detection by one detection means may be used as the transition condition. In this case, the condition may be that only the detection means has detected, or the predetermined condition that the detection means has performed a plurality of detections in a predetermined manner (the number of detections, the detection interval, etc.) may be the predetermined condition. ..

Moreover, although the detection sensor of the winning area is used as the detection means used for establishing the transition condition, other detection sensors may be used. For example, the touch sensor of the operation handle 24 or the set value change switch 151 may be usable. However, it is preferable that the transition condition includes detection by a detection unit that cannot be freely operated by the player during the game, such as a detection sensor in the winning area.

Further, a plurality of DIP switches are provided at positions that can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened, and are used as detection means used to establish the transition condition, and transition is made when the state of each DIP switch is a predetermined state. The condition may be satisfied. Further, a keyboard may be provided at a position where it can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened, and it can be used as a detecting means used to establish the transition condition, and the transition condition can be established by the password input from the keyboard. ..

Further, only when the set value change switch 151 is turned on when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, it is possible to shift to the probability set value changed state by monitoring the establishment of the transition condition, but the power of the gaming machine is turned on. At times, even if the set value change switch 151 is not turned on, it may be possible to monitor the establishment of the transition condition and shift to the probability set value change state. In this case, the period for constantly monitoring the establishment of the transition condition may be set based on the power-on of the gaming machine, or the transition condition may be set when the set value change switch 151 is operated after the power-on. It is also possible to start the period for monitoring the establishment of.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives a game value to a player Detection means used (gate switch 34a, winning a prize switch 35a,
The starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the special winning opening switch 38a) and the probability setting values to which the probability values used for the lottery of the game are assigned are set to the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), A setting means (game control device 100) is provided which allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values based on the operation of the setting value change button (setting value change switch 151), and the setting means is a mode predetermined by the detection means. When it is detected, the probability setting value can be selected. Therefore, since the detection of the predetermined mode by the detection means performs the same function as the setting key, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being illegally changed.
Further, the number of gaming machines that can simultaneously perform the probability setting value changing operation is not limited to the number of setting keys, and the probability setting value changing operation can be performed simultaneously by a plurality of gaming machines, resulting in work efficiency. Is improved.

In addition, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a player a game value is used in a game. A plurality of detection means (gate switch 34a, winning opening switch 35a, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, big winning opening switch 38a), and probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery of the game are assigned, Setting means (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) The setting means is configured to enable selection of the probability setting value when a plurality of detecting means detect a predetermined mode. Therefore, since the detection of the predetermined mode by the detection means performs the same function as the setting key, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being illegally changed. Further, the number of gaming machines that can simultaneously perform the probability setting value changing operation is not limited to the number of setting keys, and the probability setting value changing operation can be performed simultaneously by a plurality of gaming machines, resulting in work efficiency. Is improved.

The setting means enables the probability setting value to be selected when the detection means detects the predetermined mode in a certain period after the power is turned on. Therefore,
It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed unintentionally.

In addition, the plurality of detection means cannot be operated by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed unintentionally.

[Fourth Modification]
Next, a fourth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the probability setting value is changed by the setting value changing operation unit configured by the DIP switch.

The DIP switch that constitutes the set value changing operation unit is provided at a position that can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened, and the input state thereof is input to the CPU 111A. As shown in FIG. 41, three DIP switches SW1 to SW3 are provided as the set value change operation unit, and the state of the DIP switch corresponding to each probability set value is defined.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the probability set value changing process shown in FIG. 42 is performed instead of the probability set value changing process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value changing process, it is determined whether or not the state of the setting value changing operation unit has changed (step S461), and if it has changed (step S461), the value of the work probability setting value area is set to the corresponding value. (Step S462). As a result, the desired probability setting value can be set by operating the setting value changing operation unit during the probability setting value changing state and ending the probability setting value changing state as a state corresponding to the desired probability setting value. Becomes

By using the DIP switch in this manner, the work of setting a desired probability setting value becomes easy, and the set probability setting value can be grasped at a glance. Since the probability setting values that have been set can be grasped at a glance, the probability setting value display device 153
May not be provided. Further, a cover for covering the dip switch may be attachable so that the state of the dip switch is not immediately visible when the front frame 12 is opened.

Further, in order to make it easy to grasp the state of each DIP switch, a confirmation LED may be provided corresponding to each DIP switch and lighted when the corresponding DIP switch is ON. Further, the confirmation LED may be constantly turned on, or may be turned on only in the probability set value changing state or the probability set value confirmation mode.

Further, the set value changing operation unit is not limited to the DIP switch, but may be a toggle switch or a rotary type switch, as long as it is possible to grasp the probability set value by visually checking the state of each switch. Anything is fine.

Also, the probability setting value change state is set according to the state of the setting key switch 152.
As in the third modified example described above, the probability setting value changing state may be changed depending on the state of the setting value changing switch 151, and the probability setting value changing state may be ended after a predetermined time elapses. In this case, the probability setting value may be set based on the state of the setting value changing operation unit when the predetermined time has elapsed, or based on the state of the setting value changing operation unit at the time when the predetermined confirmation operation is performed. The probability setting value may be set.

Further, when the probability setting value change state is not set, the currently set probability setting value is compared with the state of the setting value change operation unit, and monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether the two states match. Is also good. The monitoring process may be always performed when the probability setting value is not changed, or may be performed only at a predetermined time such as when the power is turned on or when the special figure variation display game is started.
Alternatively, it may be periodically performed at regular intervals. When it is determined by the monitoring process that the two states do not match, it may be notified that an abnormality has occurred, or the game may be stopped.

[Fifth Modification]
Next, a fifth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification has a setting key switch 152 and a CP for making the probability setting value changeable.
If the wiring between U111A and the U111A is broken, a game cannot be played.

In this modification, a setting sub-board is provided which is a setting means including a setting value change button, a setting key operation unit, a probability setting value display device 153, etc., and this setting sub-board is connected to the game control device 100. It is like this. For example, as shown in FIG. 43A, the wiring from the setting key switch 152 provided on the setting sub-board is connected to the game control device 100 via the connector 154.
Connected with. Note that the setting value change switch 151 is not shown here.

FIG. 43A shows a case where the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not in the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is closed so that the input to the CPU 111A is LOW, and it is recognized that the input from the setting key switch 152 is off. Based on this, the probability setting value change state is prevented and the game is allowed to proceed. Further, in the gaming machine of the present modified example, an LED serving as a confirmation means that allows the state of the setting key switch 152 to be visually recognized is provided. In the state of FIG. 14A, the confirmation means is turned off, and it can be confirmed that the setting key switch 152 is recognized to be in the off state.

FIG. 43B shows a case where the setting key of the setting key operation unit is in the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is open, and the input to the CPU 111A is HI, and it is recognized that the setting key switch 152 is on. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized to be in the on state.

As described above, when the power is turned on, the probability setting value change state is set on condition that the setting key of the setting key operation unit is in the second position and the input from the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state. It is configured. That is, the input of the ON state from the setting key switch 152 forms the specific operation information that is input when the operation unit is operated to be in the specific state, and based on the input of this specific operation information. The state is changed to the probability setting value in which the probability setting value can be selected. In this probability setting value changing state, the game is not allowed to proceed, and by ending the probability setting value changing state, the game can proceed.

43C shows the case where the wiring between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A is broken, and FIG. 43D shows the case where the connector 154 is disconnected. CPU in any case
The input to 111A is set to HI, and the setting key switch 152 is recognized to be in the ON state. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized to be in the on state.

That is, since the state becomes the same as when the probability setting value is changeable, the specific operation information is input also in this case. As a result, the probability setting value is changed and the game cannot be progressed. In this way, the specific operation information is input even in the case of disconnection or disconnection of the connector, so that it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding in the case of abnormality.
Further, since the confirmation means is in a lighted state even though the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not in the second position, it is possible to visually confirm that an abnormality has occurred.

Here, the example in which the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 are connected by the connector 154 is described, but they may be directly connected without the connector 154. Further, the setting sub-board that constitutes the setting means including the setting key switch 152 and the like is the game control device 10.
Although it is provided separately from 0, the game control device 100 may be provided with a setting key switch 152 or the like and the setting means may be integrated with the game control device 100. In this case also, the setting is made by the same configuration. It is possible to detect disconnection between the key switch 152 and the CPU 111A or disconnection of the connector.

Further, here, the specific operation information is input when the connection between the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 is lost, but the specific operation is performed when the connection between the setting sub-board and the game control device 100 is lost. Information may be input. Alternatively, the setting sub-board may check the connection status of the setting key switch 152 and the like in the setting sub-board, and if there is an abnormality, the setting sub-board may output the specific operation information.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to a player A control unit (game control device 100) for controlling and a probability setting value, which is connected to the control unit and to which a probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned, is set in the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)). A setting unit (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability set values by operating a value change button (set value change switch 151)), and is operated so that the operation unit enters a specific state. Based on this, the specific operation information is input to the control means so that the probability setting value can be selected, and the control means does not advance the game in the state where the specific operation information is input. When the wiring between the setting means and the control means is broken, the specific operation information is input to the control means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the act of illegally changing the probability setting value.

Further, when the power is turned on while the operation unit is operated so as to be in a specific state, the probability setting value can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the act of illegally changing the probability setting value.

[Sixth Modification]
Next, a sixth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. The game machine of this modification is different in the transition condition to the probability set value confirmation mode.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
In this modification, the probability setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 44 is performed instead of the probability setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. In this probability setting value confirmation process, if a game is being played (step S433; Y
), the off-state confirmation flag is cleared (step S474), and the probability setting value confirmation processing ends. When the game is not in progress (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S434), and when it is not in the on state (step S434;
N) sets the off-state confirmation flag (step S473) and ends the probability set value confirmation process. The off-state confirmation flag is information indicating that the setting key switch was in the off state when the game was not in progress.

Then, when the setting key switch is in the on state (step S434; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an off state confirmation flag (step S471). If there is an off-state confirmation flag (step S471; Y), the off-state confirmation flag is cleared (step S472),
The process after step S435 is performed to shift to the probability set value confirmation mode. On the other hand, if there is no off-state confirmation flag (step S471; N), the probability setting value confirmation processing ends. That is, when the setting key switch is in the on state during the game and is not in the game state, the probability setting value confirmation mode is not shifted, and the setting key switch is in the off state in the non-game state. When the state changes to the on state, the mode is changed to the probability set value confirmation mode.

In this way, by not switching to the probability setting value confirmation mode when the setting key switch is still in the on state during the game, it is not possible to switch to the probability setting value confirmation mode. It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being displayed by switching to the probability setting value confirmation mode when the player is not in the game (state not in prohibition state) after that, when the setting key switch is turned on without doing so. .. That is, the probability setting value can be confirmed only when the operation is performed with the intention of confirming the probability setting value.

From the above, the setting means (game control device 100), the control means (game control device 100)
) Is controlled by the operation unit (setting key operation unit (
The confirmation state is set only when the state of the setting key switch 152)) is changed to the predetermined state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally shown.

[Seventh Modification]
Next, a seventh modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. The gaming machine of the present modified example is provided with a RAM clear button as a third operation unit in addition to a setting key operation unit forming the first operation unit and a set value change button forming the second operation unit. A signal from the RAM clear switch that detects the operation of the RAM clear button is input to the game control device 100. The RAM clear button, like the setting key operation unit and the set value change button, cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.

[Main processing]
In this modification, the main process shown in FIG. 45 is performed instead of the main process shown in FIG. In this main process, if the RAM clear switch is in the on state (the RAM clear button is pressed) (step S481; Y), the process proceeds to step S41. That is,
The RAM clear switch serves as an operation unit for initializing the RAM 111C.

[Probability setting value change processing]
Further, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 46 is performed instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value changing process, if there is an input from the RAM clear switch (is in the ON state) (step S482; Y), the process from step S412 is executed to confirm the selected probability setting value. To do.

In this way, by turning on the power while the RAM clear button is pressed, the RAM 111
Since the initialization of C can be performed and the probability setting value can be confirmed by the RAM clear button, the work of initializing the RAM and the confirmation of the probability setting value can be selected using the minimum operation unit. It is possible to improve the work efficiency in the game store. Further, it is not necessary to provide an operation section more than necessary, the cost for manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation section can be reduced.

When the setting key switch is operated when the power is turned on, the probability setting value is changed and the RAM is initialized, whereas when the RAM clear button is operated when the power is turned on, the probability setting value is changed. Since it is possible to perform only the initialization of the RAM without shifting to the state, it may be necessary to operate the setting key switch or shift to the probability setting value change state when only the initialization of the RAM is desired. Without, it is possible to improve the work efficiency in the game store.

From the above, the setting means (game control device 100) has a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151), RAM.
When the power of the gaming machine is turned on while a predetermined operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)) of the clear button (RAM clear switch) is operated In addition, the storage means (RAM 111C) can be initialized. By operating a predetermined operation unit (RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)), the selected probability setting value can be confirmed.

In addition, the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, the game is controlled in a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to the player. The control means (game control device 100) and the probability setting values to which the probability values used for the lottery of the game are assigned are the first operation section (setting key operation section (setting key switch 152)), the second
Setting means (game control device) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the operation unit (setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) and the third operation unit (RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)) 100), storage means (RAM 111C) capable of storing information necessary for controlling the game by the control means, including information on the probability setting value selected by the setting means, and a closed state covering the front surface of the gaming machine 10. An open state is provided with a main body frame (front frame 12) that can be converted into an open state and open/close detection means (game control device 100) capable of detecting the open/closed state of the main body frame. If it is detected by the opening/closing detection means, and when the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the first operation portion is operated, the probability setting value can be changed and the storage means is initialized. The probability setting value can be changed when the opening/closing detection means detects that the main body frame is in the open state, and when the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the third operation portion is operated. This means that the storage means is initialized without being in such a state. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform the operation of changing the probability setting value when only the initialization of the RAM is desired, and the work efficiency in the game shop can be improved.

Further, the control means detects that the body frame is in the open state by the open/close detection means, and
When the power of the game machine is turned on while the operation section and the third operation section are operated, the probability setting value is changed and the storage means is initialized, and the main body frame is closed. When the state is detected by the opening/closing detection means, and the power of the gaming machine is turned on with the first operation part and the third operation part being operated, the probability setting value can be changed. Instead, the storage means is initialized. Therefore, even if the first operation part and the third operation part are operated at the same time, it is possible to shift to the probability set value changing state, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency in the game shop. Further, when the main body frame is in the closed state, even if the first operating portion is operated, the probability setting value change state is not entered, and thus fraudulent acts can be prevented.

In FIG. 45, the state of the setting key switch is set prior to the confirmation of the state of the RAM clear switch so that the probability setting value change state is entered even when the setting key operation unit and the RAM clear button are operated at the same time. However, the setting key switch is on and the RAM is
The state in which the clear switch is on may be used as a condition for transition to the probability setting value change state.
By making the operation of a plurality of operation units a condition, it is possible to clearly confirm the intention to shift to the probability set value changing state.

Further, in the case of the gaming machine of the first embodiment which is not provided with the RAM clear button, the open/closed detection means detects that the main body frame is in the open state, and the set key operation part and the set value change button are operated. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the probability setting value can be changed and the storage means is initialized, and the opening/closing detection means detects that the main body frame is closed, and When the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the setting key operation unit and the set value change button are operated, the storage means is initialized without changing the probability set value. It can be said that In this case as well, the condition that the setting key switch is on and the setting value change switch is on may be the condition for shifting to the probability setting value change state.

Further, the setting means can change the probability setting value by operating the second operation unit. Further, the setting means can determine the selected probability setting value by operating the third operation unit.

Note that the functions of the probability value changing switch and the RAM clear switch may be replaced with each other in FIG. That is, when there is an input from the RAM clear switch, the processing from step S407 is performed, the probability setting value to be selected is changed, and when there is an input from the setting value change switch, the processing from step S412 is performed. Alternatively, the process of confirming the selected probability setting value may be performed.

[Eighth Modification]
Next, an eighth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. The game machine of this modification is different in the probability setting value determination operation.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In this modification, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 47 is performed instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value changing process, when the setting value changing switch is operated in the first input mode (step S491; Y), the processes from step S407 are performed to change the selected probability setting value. Further, when the setting value change switch is operated in the second input mode (step S492; Y), the processing from step S412 is performed, and the processing to determine the selected probability setting value is performed.

The first input mode here is an input mode in which the setting value change button is pressed and the pressing is completed within less than a predetermined time, and there is the first input mode when the pressing is completed. I try to judge. That is, the probability setting value is changed when the pressing operation is performed for a short time and the setting value changing button is released (when the setting value changing switch 151 is turned off). The reason why the set value change button is released is to prevent the probability set value from being updated when the second input mode described below is performed.

Further, the second input mode is an input mode in which the setting value change button is pressed and the pressing is terminated for a predetermined time or more, and there is the second input mode when the specified time elapses. I try to judge. That is, the probability setting value is fixed when the pressing operation is performed for a long time exceeding the specified time (when the setting value change switch 151 is turned on for the specified time or longer).

In this way, the probability setting value can be selected and confirmed by the setting value change button, and the RAM 111C can be initialized by turning on the power while the setting value change button is pressed. The operations of changing and confirming the set value and clearing the RAM can be selectively performed using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency at the game shop can be improved.
Further, it is not necessary to provide an operation section more than necessary, the cost for manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation section can be reduced. It should be noted that the first input mode and the second input mode are not limited to the above-described operations, and may be any operations as long as they can be discriminated from each other.

From the above, the setting means (game control device 100), the predetermined operation unit of the plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) When the power of the game machine is turned on in the operated state, the storage means (RAM1
11C) can be initialized, and by operating a predetermined operation unit,
The selected probability setting value can be confirmed.

[Ninth Modification]
Next, a ninth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. The game machine of this modification is different in the transition condition to the probability set value confirmation mode.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
In this modification, the probability set value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 48 is performed instead of the probability set value confirmation processing shown in FIG. In this probability setting value confirmation processing, if the game is not in progress (step S433; N
), it is determined whether a predetermined abnormality has occurred (step S501). Then, when a predetermined abnormality has occurred (step S501; Y), the probability setting value confirmation processing is terminated and the probability setting value confirmation mode is not shifted.

The predetermined abnormality can be set arbitrarily, but here, it is illegal magnets, illegal board radio waves, illegal frame radio waves, illegal general electricity, and special winning opening. When any of these abnormalities is occurring, it is determined that the predetermined abnormality is occurring. These abnormalities are abnormalities caused by fraudulent acts, and if such abnormalities occur, the probability setting value is known to the person who conducts the fraudulent activity by not switching to the probability setting value confirmation mode. It is possible to prevent that.

Further, the switch abnormality, the shoot ball out error, the overflow error, the payout abnormality error, and the glass frame opening error due to the occurrence of the connector disconnection or the like are not included in the predetermined abnormality, but may be included in the predetermined abnormality. Further, since the front frame 12 is opened and the setting key operation unit and the set value change button are operated, the front frame opening error is not included in the predetermined abnormality.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30, when any of these abnormalities has occurred, a security signal forming specific external information is output to the outside so that the gaming shop side is notified of the occurrence of the abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known before the staff member confirms the occurrence of the abnormality.

It should be noted that this security signal is output for a predetermined period even when the RAM 111C is initialized or the probability setting value confirmation mode is started to prompt confirmation of the gaming machine. A device external to the gaming machine can recognize that a predetermined abnormality has occurred based on the security signal being output for a predetermined time.

In addition, even if the setting key switch is turned on when a predetermined abnormality occurs, the setting key switch is not switched to the probability set value confirmation mode.However, when the predetermined abnormality occurs, the setting key switch is turned on. If all of the predetermined abnormalities are resolved while the ON state is kept, the probability set value confirmation mode is entered from that point. By doing so, the probability setting value can be automatically confirmed when all the predetermined abnormalities are resolved, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

Also, by applying the configuration of the sixth modification described above, the probability setting value confirmation mode is entered only when the setting key switch is changed from the off state to the on state in the state where a predetermined abnormality has not occurred. You can In this case, when the game is being played (step S433; Y) and the predetermined abnormality is being generated (step S501; Y), the off-state confirmation flag is cleared.

In this way, it is impossible to switch to the probability set value confirmation mode by not switching to the probability set value confirmation mode when the setting key switch remains in the ON state from the state where the predetermined abnormality has occurred. If the setting key switch is unintentionally turned on in the state where a predetermined abnormality that is a state has occurred, then all the predetermined abnormalities are cleared (states that are not prohibited states), and the probability set value It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being displayed after shifting to the confirmation mode. That is, the probability setting value can be confirmed only when the operation is performed with the intention of confirming the probability setting value.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to a player The control unit (game control device 100) for controlling, and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned, the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152),
And a setting means (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)), and the setting means is operated to operate the operation portion to a predetermined position. Based on the state, it is possible to make a confirmation state in which the probability setting value can be confirmed, and when the game state controlled by the control means is a state where a predetermined abnormality has occurred. Means that even if the operation unit is in the predetermined state, the confirmation state is not set.
Therefore, it becomes possible to select whether or not to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode depending on the state of the game, and it is possible to prevent inconvenience caused by the probability setting value being displayed.

Further, the predetermined abnormality includes a plurality of types of abnormality, the control means can output information to the outside of the gaming machine, and if any of the predetermined abnormality has occurred, the predetermined abnormality is detected. It means that the specific external information (security signal) is output to the outside until all are eliminated. Therefore, it becomes possible to notify the outside of the gaming machine that a predetermined abnormality has occurred, and also to the outside that the probability setting value cannot be confirmed, and the probability setting value is indicated. This can prevent inconveniences.

Further, it is provided with a storage means (RAM111C) capable of storing information necessary for controlling the game, and the control means, when the storage means is initialized and when the confirmation state is started, provides the specific external information for a predetermined period. It is supposed to output. Therefore, it is possible to notify the outside of the gaming machine that a situation requiring confirmation of the gaming machine has occurred.

Also, the setting means, when the predetermined abnormality has occurred, the operation section is set to the predetermined state,
When all the predetermined abnormalities are resolved while the predetermined state is maintained, it means that the confirmation state is set based on the elimination of all the predetermined abnormalities. Therefore, the probability setting value can be automatically confirmed when the predetermined abnormality does not occur, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

In addition, the setting means sets the confirmation state only when the operation unit is changed to the predetermined state while the predetermined abnormality is not occurring. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally shown.

[Tenth Modification]
Next, a tenth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification can shift to the probability set value confirmation mode even during the game.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
In this modification, the probability set value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 49 is performed instead of the probability set value confirmation processing shown in FIG. In this probability setting value confirmation process, if the setting key switch is in the ON state (
In step S434; Y), it is determined whether a game is being played (step S511). When not playing the game (step S511; N), the process proceeds to step S435.

On the other hand, when the game is being played (step S511; Y), the game interruption is set (step S511).
512), the game interruption flag is set (step S513), and the process proceeds to step S435. As a result, it is possible to shift to the probability set value confirmation mode even during the game, and the game is suspended during the probability set value confirmation mode.

Further, after performing the processing of step S442, it is determined whether or not there is a game interruption flag (step S514). If there is no game interruption flag (step S514; N), that is, if the game is not interrupted, the probability setting value confirmation processing ends. Further, if there is a game interruption flag (step S514; Y), that is, if the game is interrupted, game restart is set (step S515), the game interruption flag is cleared (step S516), and the probability setting value is set. The confirmation process ends. As a result, the game that has been interrupted with the end of the probability set value confirmation mode will be restarted.

In the state where the game is suspended, the display on the collective display device 50 may be temporarily erased, or the state immediately before the suspension may be continued. Further, when the game is interrupted during the variable display of the special figure variable display game or the normal figure variable display game, the variable display on the collective display device 50 may be continued. Further, the collective display device 50 may display a display indicating that it is in an interrupted state.

In addition, when the game is interrupted, an interruption command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and when the game is restarted, a restart command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, so that the display device 41, voice, LED, etc. The effect corresponding to the interruption may be performed by the light emitting member or the movable accessory. Further, the display and the like on the display device 41 when the game is restarted may be the same as the display and the like on the display device 41 when the power is restored.

In addition, even if the game is suspended, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, the general winning opening 3
5 and the special variable winning device 38 may be won or invalidated. Also,
The payout of the game balls may be continued even during the interruption of the game.

[Eleventh Modification]
Next, an eleventh modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and mainly different portions will be described. explain. The gaming machine of the present modification outputs the sound accompanying the change of the probability setting value.

FIG. 50A shows an example in which the probability setting value is changed. When the power of the gaming machine is in the off state, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position to set the setting key switch to the on state (t11), and when the power of the gaming machine is turned on in this state, the setting is performed. The value is changed (t12). Based on the setting value change state, the game control device 100 transmits a command of which the probability setting is being changed to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 informs that the probability setting value is being changed based on the reception of this command. Output the change notification sound. Although any voice may be used as the change notification voice, for example, a voice "probability setting value is being changed", a specific music or an alarm sound may be used. Further, the probability setting value change state is also notified by the display of the display device 41 or the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board effect device 44. Is also good. For example, the display device 41 may display "Probability setting value is being changed". That is, the production device used in the game is used to notify that the probability setting value is being changed. By making a notification using the production device in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the probability setting value is being changed, and even if the probability setting value is changed illegally during business, the salesclerk of the game store and the surrounding This can be noticed by the player and can prevent illegal games from being played.

Then, when the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the first position so that the setting key switch is turned off, the probability setting value changing state ends (t13). Based on the end of the set value change state, the game control device 100 sends a command to end the probability setting change to the effect control device 300.
Based on the reception of this command, the effect control device 300 outputs the probability setting value notification voice for notifying the information of the probability setting value set for a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes) (t13 to t14). After that, the sound output according to the state of the game is performed (t14).

Any sound may be used as the probability setting value notification sound, but as shown in FIG. 50B, for example, a sound corresponding to the set probability setting value is output. For example, when the probability setting value is 1, the sound "probability setting value 1 has been set" is output. Of course, other sound may be used, or specific music or alarm sound may be used. Further, the display device 41 also performs display according to the similarly set probability setting value. For example, when the probability setting value is 1, the display "probability setting value 1 has been set" is displayed. Of course, other displays may be used.

In addition to this, the probability setting value is informed that the display of the sub-information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board effect device 44 correspond to the set probability setting value. You may do it. That is, the probability setting value is informed using the effect device used in the game. In this way, by using the effect device to notify, it is possible to clearly notify that the probability setting value has been changed, and even if the probability setting value is illegally changed during business, the salesclerk of the amusement store and the surrounding games. This can be noticed by a person, and an illegal game can be prevented from being played.

When the probability setting value is changed, external information indicating that the probability setting value is changed is output so that the external device (such as a hall computer) can recognize that the probability setting value is changed. Is also good. Also, in the probability setting value confirmation mode, similarly, external information indicating that the probability setting value confirmation mode is output is output so that the external device (such as a hall computer) is in the probability setting value confirmation mode. It may be graspable. By doing so, it is possible for the amusement store side to immediately understand the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode, and prevent fraudulent activity.

Further, the game may not be allowed to proceed for a predetermined period after the end of the probability setting value change state. Further, the probability setting value notification voice may be output for a period in which the game cannot proceed. By doing so, even if the probability setting value is illegally changed during business, the game cannot be immediately played, and it is possible to prevent the game from being illegally advanced. Further, when the probability setting value confirmation mode is set, it is determined that the probability setting value confirmation mode is the speaker 19a, 19b, the display device 41, the sub information display device 90, the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 4.
6, it may be notified by a production device such as the board production device 44.

Also, each time the probability setting value is updated by an operation in the probability setting value changing state, a sound corresponding to the updated probability setting value may be output. Further, other production devices may similarly notify the updated probability set value in response to the update of the probability set value. Thereby, the selected probability setting value can be easily confirmed.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of the start condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to the player Control means for performing control (game control device 100) and setting means for making it possible to select a probability setting value to which a probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the operation unit (game control). Device 100) and an effect device (speaker 19a) for effecting a game.
, 19b, the display device 41, the sub information display device 90, the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device 44), and the selected probability setting value can be notified by the effect device. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity. In addition, the production device can notify that the probability setting value can be changed. In addition, the production device can notify that the probability setting value can be confirmed.

In addition, after the probability setting value change state ends, the progress of the game is prohibited for a predetermined period. Therefore, even if the probability setting value is changed illegally during business, the game cannot be immediately played, and it is possible to prevent the game from being illegally advanced.

<Suggestive production>
The gaming machine 10 is capable of executing a pseudo continuous effect for temporarily stopping and re-changing the decorative special symbol (identification information) and a suggestive effect for suggesting execution of the pseudo continuous effect. The suggestive effect is an effect that suggests that the pseudo-relational effect may be executed, and the suggestive effect may be executed even if the pseudo-relational effect is not executed. That is, after the suggestive effect is executed, the pseudo continuous effect may be executed, or the pseudo continuous effect may not be executed.

FIG. 51 shows an example of the suggestive effect of this embodiment.
When the special figure variation display game starts, the effect control device 300 executes the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41.
During execution of the decorative special figure variable display game, the display device 41 displays a decorative special figure variable display game display portion 41a for displaying the decorative special figure variable display game, as shown in FIG. First standby hold display section 41b displaying a decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the first starting memory
1 and a second waiting pending display section 41b2 for displaying a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the unexecuted second start memory, and a start memory being used (corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed). A small symbol that is relatively smaller than the decoration special symbol (identification information) that is variably displayed on the decoration pending display variation display game display unit 41a that displays the information regarding the starting memory) is displayed. A small symbol variation display portion 41d and a number hold display portion 41e for displaying the number of undigested starting memories by numbers are provided.

The effect control device 300, for example, at the start of the decorative special figure variable display game, whether or not to execute the pseudo continuous effect in the decorative special figure variable display game, an effect control command signal (effect command) from the game control device 100. Pseudo continuous production lottery determined based on, etc., and suggestion production lottery that determines based on a production control command signal (production command) or the like from the game control device 100 whether or not to execute suggestion production in the decorative special figure variation display game. And do.
When the suggestion effect lottery is won, the effect control device 300, for example, FIG.
), an execution suggestion image G1 that is an image that suggests that the pseudo effect may be executed by performing the suggestion effect at a predetermined timing during the execution of the decorative special figure variation display game. , And an expectation degree suggesting image G2 that is an image that suggests an expectation degree (execution expectation degree) at which the pseudo continuous effect is executed.
Further, when the pseudo continuous production lottery is won, the production control device 300, for example, FIG.
), the pseudo continuous effect is started at a predetermined timing during the execution of the decorative special figure variation display game, and the pseudo continuous symbol G3 for notifying the start of the revariation is stopped and displayed.

Since the pseudo continuous symbol G3 is stopped and displayed at the start of the pseudo continuous effect, the execution suggestion image G1 can be said to be an image that suggests that the pseudo continuous symbol G3 may be stopped and displayed. Similarly, it can be said that the expectation suggesting image G2 is an image that suggests the expectation that the pseudo continuous symbol G3 is stopped and displayed.
In the decorative special figure variable display game shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 54 which will be described later, after a plurality of decorative special symbols are variably displayed in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas on the display device 41, the left, middle,
Although the variable display is stopped in the right order to display the result mode, the stop display order of the decorative special symbols in the decorative special figure variable display game is not limited to the order of left, middle and right, and can be changed as appropriate. Yes, for example, the order may be left, right, and middle.

Here, in the present embodiment, the only difference between the execution suggestion image G1 and the pseudo continuous symbol G3 is the level of transparency. Specifically, the execution suggestion image G1 is an image in which an opaque pseudo continuous pattern G3 is semitransparent. That is, the image displayed on the back side of the execution suggestion image G1 is visible (or easily visible) through the execution suggestion image G1, but is displayed on the back side of the pseudo continuous pattern G3. The present image is invisible through the pseudo continuous symbol G3.
The difference between the execution suggestion image G1 and the pseudo continuous pattern G3 is not limited to high and low transparency, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, a state in which a predetermined image is temporarily stopped is referred to as an execution suggestion image G1,
The state in which the predetermined image is stopped may be referred to as a pseudo continuous symbol G3.

The expectation degree suggesting image G2 is displayed side by side with the execution suggesting image G1 as shown in, for example, FIG. 51(b), and the execution suggesting image G2 is displayed in front of the execution suggesting image G1 as shown in, for example, FIG. 51(d). In some cases, it is displayed so as to be superimposed on the suggestion image G1. That is, the display mode of the expectation degree suggestive image G2 includes a display mode in which it is displayed side by side with the execution suggestive image G1 and a display mode in which it is displayed overlaid on the execution suggestive image G1, and different execution expectation depending on the display mode. The degree can be suggested.
Of the display modes of the expectation suggestion image G2, the display mode superimposed on the execution suggestion image G1 is, for example, the mode shown in FIG. 51D (that is, the entire expectation suggestion image G2 is the execution suggestion image). G1), or a part of the expectation suggestion image G2 may overlap the execution suggestion image G1.

Further, the display mode in which the execution suggestion image G1 is displayed in an overlapping manner may be a mode in which the expectation suggestion image G2 is displayed behind the execution suggestion image G1 in an overlapped manner with the execution suggestion image G1. Since the execution suggestion image G1 is a semi-transparent image, both the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation suggestion image G2 are visible even when the expectation suggestion image G2 is arranged behind the execution suggestion image G1. The expectation degree suggesting image G2 may be a semitransparent image. By making both the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation suggestion image G2 semitransparent images, the state of the decorative special pattern that is changing at high speed (
The variable display mode) and the like are also visible.

The expectation degree suggesting image G2 includes a first specific image (character image “?”) and a second specific image (“
!! Character image). That is, as the display mode of the expectation suggestive image G2, there are a plurality of display modes in which the type, the number, and the order of arrangement of the specific images forming the expectation suggesting image G2 are different, and different execution expectation levels are suggested depending on the display mode. You can do it.

FIG. 52A shows an example of the execution expectation degree suggested by the expectation degree suggesting image G2.
The display mode of the expectation degree suggesting image G2 is, for example, as shown in FIG. 52A, a display mode (“?”) including one first specific image and a display including one second specific symbol. Aspect (“!”)
A display mode (“??”) composed of two first specific images, a display mode (“!”) composed of two second specific symbols, and a second specific symbol on the right side of the first specific symbol. A display mode in which the symbols are arranged on the left side (“!?”) and a display mode in which the second specific symbols are arranged on the right side and the first specific symbols are arranged on the left side (“?!”).
)), depending on the type and number of specific images forming the expectation suggestive image G2, and the order of arrangement,
The suggested execution expectations differ.

Furthermore, as the display mode of the expectation suggestion image G2, for example, as shown in FIG. 52A, a display mode in which the execution suggestion image G1 is displayed side by side, and a display mode in which the execution suggestion image G1 is displayed in an overlapping manner. Therefore, even if the type and number of specific images constituting the expectation suggestion image G2 and the arrangement order are all the same, the expectation suggestion image G2 is displayed side by side with the execution suggestion image G1 and is executed. The suggested execution expectation level differs depending on whether the image is displayed over the suggestion image G1.

Specifically, for example, the degree-of-expectation suggestion image G2 shown in FIG. 51(b), that is, a display mode (“!?”) in which the first specific symbol is arranged on the right side and the second specific symbol is arranged on the left side, and execution suggestion In the case of the expectation suggestive image G2 displayed in a display manner side by side with the image G1, for example, FIG.
As shown in b), it can be suggested that the execution expectation degree (in the case of the expectation degree suggesting image G2 shown in FIG. 51, the expectation degree at which the pseudo continuous effect is executed) is 40%.
Further, for example, in the expectation degree suggesting image G2 shown in FIG. 51D, that is, in the display mode (“!?”) in which the first specific symbol is arranged on the right side and the second specific symbol is arranged on the left side, and the execution suggesting image G1. In the case of the expectation suggestion image G2 displayed in the overlapping display mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the execution expectation degree (in the case of the expectation suggestion image G2 shown in FIG. 51, the pseudo It can be suggested that the degree of expectation that the continuous production is executed is 50%.
Which of the display modes of the degree-of-expectation suggestion image G2 is determined in the suggestion production lottery, for example.

Here, the first specific image (character image “?”) and the second specific image (character image “!”) are common to each of these two types of specific images, as shown in FIG. 52B, for example. And a non-common part that is not common.
The types of specific images are not limited to two types, and may be three or more types.
Further, the common part common to each of the plurality of types of specific images is, in addition to the part having the common shape,
It may be a portion having the same color or shade.
Further, the specific image does not have to include a common part that is common to each of a plurality of types of specific images and a non-common part that is not common. That is, the specific image does not have to have a common part that is common to each of the plurality of types of specific images, but the expected degree suggestive image G2 having a sense of unity can be displayed regardless of the display mode of the expected degree suggestive image G2. From the viewpoints of the above, it is preferable that the specific image has a common portion that is common to each of the plurality of types of specific images.

Further, the expectation suggesting image G2 is not limited to the one configured by only the specific image, and may include an image other than the specific image as long as it includes at least the specific image. Specifically, the expectation suggestive image G2 is, for example, “may it be pseudo-repeated?” (? is a specific image, so!
Ya! ? Or? !! Or? ? Ya! !! Can be changed to) or the like.
Further, the specific image is not limited to a character image, and may be a character image as shown in FIG. 53(a), for example. In the example illustrated in FIG. 53A, the non-common portion of the left specific image (first specific image) is an image portion simulating both eyes, and the non-common portion of the right specific image (second specific image) is sunglasses. Is an image part imitating, and other parts are common parts.
Further, the expectation suggestion image G2 indicates not the expectation (execution expectation) at which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, but the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is the big hit result as shown in, for example, FIG. 53B. You may make it suggest the expectation degree (big hit expectation degree). In that case, the suggestion effect can suggest that the pseudo-relation effect may be executed by the execution suggestion image G1, and the big hit expectation degree can be suggested by the expectation suggestion image G2.

Further, the suggestive effect is not limited to the effect that suggests the execution of the pseudo continuous effect, and can be changed as appropriate.
The suggestion effect may be an effect that suggests a stop display of a predetermined general symbol, as shown in FIG. 54, for example. Here, the decorative special symbols include general symbols (symbols 1 to 9) and special symbols (pseudo continuous symbols G3, etc.).

Specifically, first, the decorative special figure variable display game is started, then the variable display in the left variable display area is stopped, as shown in FIG. 54(a), and then, for example, in FIG. 54(b). As shown, the suggestion effect is performed at a predetermined timing, and the execution suggestion image G suggests that a stop display of a predetermined general symbol (here, “5”) may be executed in the middle variation display area.
1 and an expectation degree suggesting image G2 that indicates an expectation degree (execution expectation degree) at which the stop display of a predetermined general symbol is executed in the middle variation display area. Thereafter, the variable display in the middle variable display area is stopped, and a predetermined general symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(c), or other than the predetermined general symbol is stopped and displayed.

Here, since the reach state has occurred in FIG. 54(c), the suggestive effect shown in FIG. 54(b) can be said to be an effect suggesting the execution of the reach effect. That is, in the execution suggestion image G1 shown in FIG. 54(b), an image indicating that the reach effect may be executed, that is, the same decoration special symbol as the decoration special symbol already stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed. It can be said that it is an image that suggests that there is a possibility. Further, the expectation degree suggesting image G shown in FIG.
2 is also an image that suggests the degree of expectation (execution expectation) that the reach effect will be executed, that is, an image that suggests the degree of expectation that the same decorative special symbol that has already been stopped and displayed will be stopped and displayed. I can say.

In the suggestion effect that suggests the stop display of the predetermined general symbol, the expectation suggestive image G2 does not suggest the degree of expectation (execution expectation) at which the stop display of the predetermined general symbol is executed. The result of the special figure variation display game being executed may indicate an expectation degree (a big hit expectation degree) that is a big hit result.

In addition, the suggestive effect shown in FIG. 54(b) targets the middle variable display area among the three variable display areas of the left, middle, and right that configure the decorative special figure variable display game display section 41a, that is, the middle. While displaying the execution suggestion image G1 and the degree of expectation suggestion image G2 corresponding to the variable display area, the execution suggestion image G1 suggests that a predetermined general symbol may be stopped and displayed in the middle variable display area. The expectation degree suggesting image G2 indicates the degree of expectation that a predetermined general symbol is stopped and displayed in the medium variation display area, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the suggestive effect that suggests the stop display of the predetermined general symbol may be directed to the left variable display area among the three variable display areas of left, middle, and right, or the right variable display area. May be targeted.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(d), a suggestive effect that suggests a stop display of a predetermined general symbol is made for each of two variable display areas of the three variable display areas of left, middle, and right. You can go. Further, as shown in FIG. 54(e), a suggestive effect suggesting stop display of a predetermined general symbol may be performed for each of the three variable display areas of left, middle, and right.
As shown in FIG. 54(d) and FIG. 54(e), a plurality of suggestive effects are simultaneously performed by performing a suggestive effect suggesting stop display of a predetermined general symbol for each of a plurality of variable display areas. You can In addition, the result of multiple suggestive effects (whether the information suggested by the suggestive effect was correct or not) is not known at once, but is sequentially known for each left, middle, and right fluctuation stop, so that the player's expectation is increased. While continuing for a long period of time, the player's expectations can be gradually increased.

Further, the suggestive effect is, for example, as shown in FIG. 55, execution of a hold change effect that changes the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display (hereinafter referred to as “hold display”) from the first display mode to the second display mode. It may be a production that suggests.
Specifically, first, for example, as shown in FIG. 55(a), the decoration special figure variable display game is started, and then, for example, as shown in FIG. 55(b) or 55(c), predetermined timing Execution suggestion image G1 that suggests that the pending change effect may be executed, and an expectation degree suggesting image that suggests the degree of expectation (execution expectation degree) of executing the pending change effect G2
And are displayed. After that, the pending change effect is not performed and the execution suggestion image G1 is executed at a predetermined timing.
And the expectation suggestion image G2 is erased, or, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(d), the hold change effect is performed at a predetermined timing and the hold display in the first display mode (here, a circle) is changed to the second. The display is changed to a hold display (here, star). In this case, the execution suggestion image G1 is, for example,
It is the image which made the reservation display of the 2nd display mode semi-transparent.

In FIG. 55(c), a part of the expectation suggestion image G2 overlaps the execution suggestion image G1, but a display mode in which the expectation suggestion image G2 is displayed over the execution suggestion image G1. May be a mode in which all of the expectation suggestion image G2 overlaps the execution suggestion image G1, or a part of the expectation suggestion image G2 may overlap the execution suggestion image G1.
Further, in FIG. 55(c), the expectation degree suggesting image G2 is arranged in front of the execution suggesting image G1, but a display mode in which the expectation suggesting image G2 is displayed overlaid on the execution suggesting image G1. May be a mode in which the expectation suggestion image G2 is displayed in front of the execution suggestion image G1 so as to be superimposed on the execution suggestion image G1, or the expectation suggestion image G2 may be displayed behind the execution suggestion image G1. A mode of displaying the image G1 in an overlapping manner may be used.
In the suggestion effects shown in FIGS. 54(b) and 54(c), the execution suggestion image G1 and the degree of expectation corresponding to the hold display (hereinafter, referred to as “running hold display”) displayed on the running hold display unit 41c. The suggestion image G2 is displayed to suggest that the execution suggestion image G1 may change the display mode of the execution pending display, and the expectation suggestion image G2 changes the display mode of the execution pending display. But not limited to this. That is, the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation suggestion image G corresponding to the hold display (hereinafter referred to as “standby hold display”) displayed on the first waiting hold display unit 41b and the second waiting hold display unit 41b2.
2 is displayed to indicate that the display mode of the standby pending display may be changed by the execution suggestion image G1, and the display mode of the standby pending display may be changed by the expectation suggestion image G2. The degree may be suggested.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a special game state can be generated when the result of the game is a special result. In a game machine, a suggestion effect execution means (effect control device 300) is provided for executing a suggestion effect (see FIGS. 51(b) and 51(d)) that suggests execution of a predetermined notice effect (for example, pseudo continuous effect), In the suggestive effect, it is possible to display a plurality of types of specific images (for example, a character image of "?" and a character image of "!"), and the predetermined image is displayed in accordance with the order of arrangement of the plurality of types of specific images displayed in the suggestive effect. The degree of expectation that the notice effect is executed (the degree of expectation of execution) or the degree of expectation that the game result will be a special result (the degree of expectation of a big hit) is different (see FIGS. 52A and 53B).

Therefore, the degree of expectation (execution expectation) at which the predetermined notice effect is executed or the degree of expectation that the game result is a special result (big hit Since it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation, it is possible to enhance the interest of suggestive production.
The suggestive effect is not limited to an effect that suggests the execution of the pseudo continuous effect as the predetermined notice effect, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as shown in FIG. 54(b), the reach effect as the predetermined notice effect is reached. It may be an effect that suggests execution of an effect, or may be an effect that suggests execution of a hold change effect as a predetermined notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 55(b) and 55(c), for example. When the suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the execution of the pseudo-relational effect, a pseudo-relational suggestion image that suggests the execution of the pseudo-relational effect is displayed in the variable display area of the suggestion target as the execution suggestion image G1 (see FIG. 5).
1 (b) and (d)), if the suggestive effect is an effect that suggests the execution of the reach effect,
As the execution suggestion image G1, an execution of the reach effect and a reach mode suggestion image suggesting the type of the reach effect may be displayed in the variable display area of the suggestion target, or the suggestion effect suggests the execution of the pending change effect. In such a case, as the execution suggestion image G1, a hold change suggestion image suggesting execution of the hold change effect may be displayed in the suggestion target variable display area.

Further, a plurality of execution suggestion images G1 may be displayed in one variable display area. In that case, for example, as shown in FIG. 56A (a), a plurality of execution suggestion images G1 (here, reach mode suggestion images) are arranged on one circumference, and are moved along the one circumference to be predetermined. The roulette effect may be performed such that the execution suggestion image G1 stopped at the position is a real execution suggestion image, and the others are dummy execution suggestion images. By performing such a roulette effect,
Since it becomes easier to understand which execution suggestion image G1 is the real thing (which kind of reach production may be performed here), the interest of the game is improved.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 56A(b), the expectation suggestion image G2 may be configured to execute an effect of performing a predetermined operation. In that case, from the viewpoint of clarifying the correspondence between the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation suggestion image G2, the expectation suggestion image G2 operates based on a part of the expectation suggestion image G2 (partially. Is preferably fixed). FIG. 56
In the example shown in A(b), the swing motion is performed as the predetermined motion, but the predetermined motion is not limited to this and can be changed as appropriate, and may be, for example, a stretching motion.
Further, from the viewpoint of making it clearer that the execution suggesting image G1 and the expectation suggesting image G2 are different images, for example, as shown in FIG. 56A(c), the expectation suggesting image G2 is a specific image. It may include a surrounding frame image (region cut-off image, region division image, suggestive pattern-related emphasized image).

Further, among the display modes of the expectation suggestion image G2, the display mode that is displayed so as to be superimposed on the execution suggestion image G1 is, for example, as shown in FIG. 56A(d), a combination of the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation suggestion image G2. It may be a display mode that looks like the above.
In addition, the expectation suggesting image G2 may be displayed at a position apart from the suggesting execution image G1 instead of in the vicinity of the suggesting execution image G1. In that case, for example, a relationship emphasis image (effect image) that straddles the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation suggestion image G2 may be displayed so that the correspondence relationship between the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation suggestion image G2 becomes clear. preferable.

Further, the positional relationship between the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation suggestion image G2 can be appropriately selected, but from the viewpoint of preventing misidentification and clarifying the correspondence relationship between the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation suggestion image G2. For example, as shown in FIG. 56A(e), a positional relationship such that the center point (horizontal center line) of the point image below the expectation degree image G2 and the execution suggestion image G1 are at the same position, for example, as shown in FIG.
f) and (g), the positional relationship such that the point portion below the expectation suggestion image G2 and the upper side or the lower side of the execution suggestion image G1 are at the same position, or as shown in FIG. 56A(h), for example. At the position () at which the center of the expectation degree suggestive image G2 is located on the center line (vertical center line) of the execution suggestive image G1.
Alternatively, a positional relationship such that the position may be shifted to the left side or the right side from the vertical center line) is preferable. In the examples shown in FIGS. 56A(e) to 56(h), the display mode of the expectation degree suggestive image G2 is a display mode in which the expectation degree suggestive image G2 is displayed side by side with the execution suggestive image G1. The same positional relationship is preferable also in the display mode in which is displayed on the execution suggestion image G1.

Furthermore, in the display mode in which the execution suggestion image G1 is displayed side by side, the display area corresponding to the left variation display area is provided from the viewpoints of preventing misidentification and clarifying the correspondence relationship between the execution suggestion image G1 and the expectation suggestion image G2. The expectation suggestion image G2 is preferably displayed to the left of the execution suggestion image G1 corresponding to the left variation display area, as shown in FIG. 56A(f), and the expectation suggestion image corresponding to the right variation display area is displayed. The image G2 is preferably displayed to the right of the execution suggestion image G1 corresponding to the right variation display area as shown in FIG. 56A(e), and the expectation suggestion image G2 corresponding to the middle variation display area is displayed. 56A (g) and (h) in FIG. 56A, the execution suggestion image G1 corresponding to the middle variation display area is adjacent to the upper side of the execution suggestion image G1 (the lower side may be adjacent to the execution suggestion image G1. Since it may be misunderstood that the expectation degree suggesting image G2 corresponds to the suspended display, it is preferable to display it on the upper side.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the suggestive effect, there are cases in which a plurality of types of specific images are displayed, and cases in which any one of a plurality of types of specific images is displayed. When one type of specific image is displayed in the suggestive effect (for example, in the case of “?”, “!
, “??”, “!!!”), multiple types of specific images are displayed in the first arrangement order (for example, “!?”), multiple types of When the specific images are displayed in the second arrangement order (for example, “?!”), the degree of expectation (execution expectation) at which the predetermined notice effect is executed or the result of the game is expected to be a special result. It can be configured such that the degree (big hit expectation degree) is different (see FIG. 52(a) and FIG. 53(b)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest a more detailed degree of expectation, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the suggestion production.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the predetermined notice effect is at least a part of the identification after the plural pieces of identification information (decorative special symbols) are variably displayed for a predetermined period in one game (special figure variation display game). It is a pseudo continuous production that can execute unit fluctuation display that temporarily stops information,
The suggestion effect is an effect that suggests execution of the pseudo-relation effect by displaying a pseudo-relationship suggestion image (execution suggestion image G1 shown in FIGS. 51B and 51D). Depending on whether the specific image is displayed or the specific image is displayed superimposed on the pseudo-relational suggestion image, the degree of expectation that a predetermined notice effect will be executed (execution expectation degree) or the degree of expectation that the game result will be a special result ( It can be configured such that the jackpot expectation) is different (see FIG. 52(a) and FIG. 53(b)).
With this configuration, the correspondence relationship between the pseudo-relationship suggestive image and the specific image is clarified, and more detailed expectations can be suggested, so that the interest of suggestive production can be further enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the specific image can be configured by a common part common to each of the plurality of types of specific images and a non-common part that is not common (FIG. 5).
2(b)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to display a specific image with a sense of unity, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the suggestive effect.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (special figure variable display game) in which identification information (decorative special symbol) is variably displayed in a plurality of variable display areas based on the establishment of a predetermined condition is executed, and the game is executed. In a gaming machine that can generate a special game state when the result of is a special result, the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display area (the degree of expectation that the stop display of the predetermined identification information is executed. (Execution expectation)) can be executed, and expectation suggestion production (see suggestion production (see FIGS. 51(b), 54(b), (d), and (e))) can be executed. , A specific image (for example, the character image “?” or the character image “!”) is displayed, and the type of the specific image,
The degree of expectation (the degree of expectation of execution) differs depending on at least one of the number and the order of arrangement (FIG. 52(a)).
reference).

Therefore, as the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute the expectation suggestion effect that indicates the expectation degree (execution expectation degree) at which the predetermined identification information (decorative special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the variable display area. Can be increased.
In the present embodiment, the execution expectation degree and the jackpot expectation degree are changed according to the type, the number, and the arrangement order of the specific images. It would be good if the expectation of jackpot and jackpot was different. For example, there is only one type of specific image, and the degree of expectation is different depending on the number of specific images (for example, "?", "??", and "???"). It is also possible.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the expectation suggestion effect (indication effect), a specific image (for example, a character image “?” or “! Character image) is displayed, or a specific image is displayed side by side in the variable display area of the suggestion target (see FIGS. 51(b) and 51(d)).
With such a configuration, the variable display area of the suggestion target becomes clear, so that the interest of the suggestion production can be further enhanced.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (special figure variable display game) in which identification information (decorative special symbol) is variably displayed in a plurality of variable display areas based on the establishment of a predetermined condition is executed, and the game is executed. In a gaming machine that can generate a special game state when the result of is a special result, a suggestive effect that suggests that the predetermined identification information may be stopped and displayed is displayed in each of the plurality of variable display areas. It can be executed as a target (see FIGS. 54(b) and 54(e)).
A plurality of types of specific images (for example, a character image of "?" and a character image of "!") are displayed, and a predetermined identification is made in the variable display area in accordance with the arrangement order of the plurality of types of specific images displayed in the suggestive effect. The degree of expectation that information will be stopped and displayed (the degree of expectation that stop display of predetermined identification information will be executed (execution degree of expectation)) is different (see FIG. 52A).

Therefore, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that the predetermined identification information (decorative special symbol) may be stopped and displayed in the variable display area, while targeting each of the plurality of variable display areas. Since the degree of expectation (execution expectation) that the stop display is executed can be suggested by the specific image displayed in the suggestive effect, it is possible to enhance the interest of the suggestive effect.
Further, by executing the suggestive effect for each of the plurality of variable display areas, a plurality of suggestive effects can be simultaneously performed. Furthermore, since the results of multiple suggestive effects (whether the information suggested by the suggestive effects was correct or not) can be sequentially known, the player's expectations can continue for a long time, and the players' expectations can be gradually increased. You can

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the specific image displayed in the suggestive effect is displayed in an overlapping manner on the variable display area targeted by the suggestive effect in the plurality of variable display areas, or in the suggestive effect. Can be arranged side by side in the target variable display area (see FIG. 54(e)).
With such a configuration, it becomes clear which of the plurality of variable display areas is the target of the suggestive effect, so that the interest of the suggestive effect can be further enhanced.

<Modified example of suggestive production>
Here, FIG. 56B shows a modified example of the suggestion effect that suggests execution of the hold change effect that changes the display mode of the hold display (particularly, the standby hold display) from the first display mode to the second display mode.
Specifically, first, as shown in, for example, FIG. 56B(a), the decorative special figure variable display game is started, and, as shown in, for example, FIG. 56B(b), a suggestive effect is given at a predetermined timing. The display mode of a predetermined waiting hold display (waiting hold display other than the waiting hold display to be changed) changes from the first display mode (here, circle) to the intermediate display mode (here, double circle), It is suggested that the hold change effect may be executed. It should be noted that the expectation suggestion image G2 that indicates the expectation (execution expectation) at which the pending change effect is executed may be displayed side by side or overlapping with the waiting pending display in the intermediate display mode.

Next, as shown in, for example, FIGS. 56B (d) and (e), the first character image G41,
A second character image G42 that performs a predetermined operation around the standby hold display section (the first standby hold display section 41b1 and the second standby hold display section 41b2) is displayed. 56B(d), (e)
In the example shown in (), the second character image G42 performs, as a predetermined operation, an operation of rotating around the standby holding display section in the counterclockwise direction.
Next, as shown in FIG. 56B(f), for example, the second character image G42 performs a specific operation of specifying the pending hold display to be changed. In the example shown in FIG. 56B(f), the second character image G42 performs an operation of pointing to the change pending standby display by the notification image G43 for notifying the change pending standby display as the specific operation. ing.
Next, as shown in, for example, FIG. 56B(g), an action operation is performed in which the first character image G41 acts on the pending hold display of the change target. In the example shown in FIG. 56B(g), the first character image G41 is the action image G44 simulating the hold display in the second display mode as the action motion.
It is throwing toward the pending display of the change target.
Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 56B(h), the display mode of the pending standby display of the change target is changed from the first display mode (here, circle) to the second display mode (here, star).

In the example shown in FIG. 56B, the action image G44 thrown by the first character image G41 is
Although the display is on standby after the change as it is, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first character image G41 may be the display on standby after the change, or the action image G44 and the first character image G41. The other image may be displayed as a standby display after the change.
Further, when there are a plurality of waiting pending displays to be changed, one second character image G42 is displayed.
May perform the specific operation for each standby pending display of the change target, or may perform the specific operation for the standby pending display of the change corresponding to each of the plurality of second character images G42.

Further, it is possible to expand the operation range of the predetermined operation of the second character image G42 not only to the waiting holding display section but also to the executing holding display section 41c. That is, as a predetermined action on the second character image G42, for example, a waiting holding display section (first waiting holding display section 41b) is displayed.
It is also possible to perform an operation of rotating around the first and second standby hold display portions 41b2) and the running hold display portion 41c in the counterclockwise direction. As a result, it is possible to make it appear that the display mode of the in-progress hold display may change.
Further, in the case where a counterclockwise rotating motion is performed as the predetermined motion of the second character image G42, the hold display in the first display mode may be a clockwise rotating image as shown in FIG. 56B(i), for example. An image including (here, an image simulating the hands of a clock) may be included. As a result, the predetermined motion of the second character image G42 (the motion of turning in the counterclockwise direction) can be highlighted.

<Modification A of the game board>
At least a part of the game board 30 (including the center case 40 in this modification) may be made of a transparent material.
An example of the game board 30 of the modification A will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58A. FIG. 57 is a front view schematically showing the game board 30 of Modification A, and FIG. 58A is a left-side overlapping area in the display unit of the display device 41 attached to the game board 30 of Modification A. FIG. 41B is a diagram for explaining 41L and the right overlap region 41R.

For example, as shown in FIG. 57, an opening 30b is provided in the approximate center of the game board 30, and the display unit (display area) of the display device 41 is viewed from the front of the game machine 10 through the opening 30b. It is possible. The horizontal length (width) of the opening 30b is shorter than the horizontal length of the display unit of the display device 41. Therefore, the left end area (the area on the left side surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 58A) of the display unit of the display device 41 is a left overlap region 41L that overlaps the game board 30 in the front and back, and the display of the display device 41 is displayed. The right end area of the section (the area on the right side surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 58A) is a right side overlapping area 41R that overlaps with the game board 30 in the front and back.
The game board 30 covers the left side overlapping region 41L of the display unit (overlaps left and right with the left side overlapping region 41L) and the right side covering region 41R (overlaps front and back for the right side overlapping region 41R) of the display unit. The part and the part are made of a transparent material. Therefore, the left overlap region 41L of the display unit
Is visible through the left covering portion of the game board 30 and the right overlapping region 4 of the display unit.
1R is visible through the right covering portion of the game board 30. It should be noted that the game board 30 may be made of a transparent material for at least the left covering portion and the right covering portion.

The front surface of the left-side covering portion of the game board 30 (hereinafter referred to as “left-side flow-down area 32L”) is a part of the left-side game area of the game area 32, and the game balls can flow down. Also, game board 30
The front surface of the right covering portion (hereinafter, referred to as "right-side flow-down region 32R") is a part of the right-side game region of the game region 32, and the game balls can flow down.
Therefore, it can be said that the left overlap region 41L of the display section is visible through the left flow-down region 32L of the game region 32. Further, it can be said that the right overlap region 41R of the display section is visible through the right flow region 32R of the game area 32.

In the display device 41, as the brightness of the display color of the display unit becomes lower, the amount of light that illuminates a game ball that flows down in front of the display unit (a game ball that flows down in the left side flow down region 32L and the right side flow down region 32R) decreases. Therefore, the game ball flowing down in front of the display unit looks dark. Therefore, when the display color of the display unit is too dark (the brightness of the display color is below the lower threshold value), the game ball flowing down in front of the display unit becomes the same as the display of the display unit (dark display) and is difficult to see. become.
On the other hand, as the brightness of the display color of the display unit increases, the amount of light that illuminates the game ball that flows down in front of the display unit (the game ball that flows down the left-side flow-down region 32L and the right-side flow-down region 32R) increases. The game ball flowing down in front of the club looks bright. Therefore, when the display color of the display unit is too bright (the brightness of the display color exceeds the upper threshold value), the game ball flowing down in front of the display unit becomes the same as the display (bright display) of the display unit, making it difficult to see. Become.
Therefore, even when the brightness of the display color of the display unit is lower than the lower threshold value or when the brightness of the display color of the display unit is higher than the upper threshold value, it is difficult to confirm the game ball flowing down in front of the display unit, which is an interesting aspect. Will decrease.

Therefore, in the case of the present modification, that is, in the case of using a game board 30 (for example, a game board 30 as shown in FIG. 57) in which game balls can flow down in front of the display unit of the display device 41 as the game board, At least a part of each of the left overlap region 41L and the right overlap region 41R is displayed with a color whose brightness falls within the allowable range (hereinafter, referred to as “sphere visibility ensuring color”). Specifically, as a game board, a game board 30 configured such that a game ball can flow down in front of the display unit 41 of the display device 41.
When using, the sphere visibility ensuring color is displayed in at least a part of each of the left overlap region 41L and the right overlap region 41R when creating the image data for the display device 41 stored in the image ROM 325. It will be created with due consideration.

Here, the allowable range of brightness will be described.
For example, as shown in FIG. 58B, among the images that can be displayed on the display section of the display device 41, the lightness of the color of the image with the lowest brightness (blackout image) is set to “0”, and the image is displayed on the display section of the display device 41. When the color brightness of the highest brightness image (whiteout image) among the displayable images is set to “100”, the color brightness of the image displayed on the display unit of the display device 41 takes a value from 0 to 100. ..
In the present modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 58B, the lower threshold of the brightness is set to “20” and the upper threshold is set to “80”, and the allowable range of the brightness is set to a range of 20 or more and 80 or less. That is, the luminosity of the ball visibility ensuring color falls within the range of 20 to 80. Of course, the allowable range of brightness is not limited to the range of 20 or more and 80 or less, and can be changed as appropriate.

FIG. 59 shows an example of a display effect performed when the game board 30 having a configuration in which game balls can flow down in front of the display unit of the display device 41 is used as the game board. 59A is an example of a blackout type effect, and FIG. 59B is an example of a whiteout type effect.
In the case of a blackout type effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 59A, a middle brightness image Q in which the brightness of the display color falls within the allowable range is displayed in each of the left overlap region 41L and the right overlap region 41R. By doing so, the ball visibility ensuring color can be displayed on at least a part of each of the left overlap region 41L and the right overlap region 41R.
Also in the case of a whiteout type effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 59B, the middle brightness image Q in which the brightness of the display color is within the allowable range is displayed on the left overlap region 41L and the right overlap region 41.
By displaying in each of R, the ball visibility ensuring color can be displayed in at least a part of each of the left overlap region 41L and the right overlap region 41R.

As a result, the gaming sphere flowing down the left-side flow-down area 32L of the game area 32 is the middle-brightness image Q displayed in the left-side overlap area 41L of the display unit (that is, the brightness of the display color in the left-side overlap area 41L is within the allowable range). (The area that fits in the area), and the game ball that flows down the right-side flow-down area 32R of the game area 32 is the middle-brightness image Q displayed in the right-side overlap area 41R of the display unit.
(That is, the right overlap region 41R is a region where the brightness of the display color is within the allowable range). Since the game sphere becomes easy to visually recognize at least when it passes in front of the medium brightness image Q (that is, the region where the sphere visibility ensuring color is displayed), the player is in front of the display unit of the display device 41. (That is, it is possible to easily check the game balls flowing down the left-side flow-down region 32L and the right-side flow-down region 32R), and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 59A and 59B, only the background image is shown among the images displayed on the display unit of the display device 41. That is, for example, as shown in FIGS. 58A and 58B, by displaying the background image including the medium brightness image Q, the sphere visibility is displayed on at least a part of each of the left overlap region 41L and the right overlap region 41R. Reserved colors can be displayed.

Here, in the present invention, in the drawing control of the display screen displayed on the display unit of the display device 41,
The concept of scenario data (scenario layer) is used. The scenario is divided into a plurality of display layers (scenario layers) for display effects such as a pattern variation effect, such as a background scenario, a left symbol scenario, a right symbol scenario,... This is a method of generating a picture on one screen by setting, controlling them individually as a scenario, and combining all the scenarios.
Multiple display layers (scenario layers) are categorized into display elements such as background, left pattern, right pattern, and so on, and each of them is independently divided into multiple pieces of motion information simultaneously or continuously. It is set as a table of operation scenarios for switching and displaying effects.

In the present invention, the display elements (display constituent elements) used in the effect of the display device 41 are "background", "left symbol", "right symbol", "middle symbol", "notice 1 character", "notice 2". It is divided into eight elements, "character", "holding display (decorative special figure starting memory display)", and "small design".
Then, a scenario table for display effects such as a variable effect is created for each of a plurality of display elements. In the present invention, the scenario table, "scenario table of background control", "scenario table of left symbol control", "scenario table of right symbol control", "scenario table of middle symbol control", "notice 1 character control scenario" It is created by being divided into eight elements: a "table", a "preliminary two-character control scenario table", a "holding display control scenario table", and a "small symbol control scenario table".
Further, each display element is configured by a display layer, and these display layers are sequentially overlapped from the back side of the screen toward the front side of the screen to create one display screen. In the case of the present invention, the display layer, "background layer", "left design layer", "right design layer",
There are 12 types of "medium symbol layer", "notice A layer" to "notice F layer", "holding layer" and "small symbol layer".

The effect control device 300, the effect display edit process of the main process (FIG. 32) (step C13).
In V, the predetermined images are displayed in the number of motion management areas in the order of motion management area numbers.
A process of drawing in the virtual drawing space of the RAM 326 (that is, a process of pasting a sprite of a predetermined image in the virtual drawing space) is performed.
As shown in FIG. 60, the virtual drawing space is divided into 12 drawing areas including a drawing area for motion management area 0 to a drawing area for motion management area 11. The drawing areas are arranged in the order of the numbers of the corresponding motion management areas, and the display layer in which the predetermined image is drawn is stored in each drawing area.

Specifically, in the effect display editing process, the effect control device 300 first, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 0 is not NULL, sets the “background layer” on which the predetermined image is drawn in the virtual drawing space. It is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 0.
Next, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 1 is not NULL, the "notice A layer" in which the predetermined image is drawn is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 1 in the virtual drawing space.
Next, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 2 is not NULL, the "notice B layer" in which the predetermined image is drawn is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 2 in the virtual drawing space.

Similarly, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 3 is not NULL, the "left pattern layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 3 in the virtual drawing space, and then,
If the data in the address area of the motion management area 4 is not NULL, the "right pattern layer"
Is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 4 in the virtual drawing space, and then when the data in the address area of the motion management area 5 is not NULL, the "middle pattern layer" is set as the drawing area for the motion management area 5 in the virtual drawing space. Then, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 6 is not NULL, the “notice C layer” is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 6 in the virtual drawing space, and then the address area of the motion management area 7 is stored. Data is NU
If it is not LL, the "notice D layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 7 in the virtual drawing space. Then, if the data in the address area of the motion management area 8 is not NULL, the "reserve layer" is set in the virtual drawing space. If the data in the address area of the motion management area 9 is not NULL, the "notice E layer" is stored in the drawing area for motion management area 9 in the virtual drawing space, and then When the data in the address area of the motion management area 10 is not NULL, the "notice F layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 10 in the virtual drawing space, and then the data in the address area of the motion management area 11 is not NULL. Then, the "small symbol layer" is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 11 in the virtual drawing space, and the effect display editing process is ended.

Here, when the data of the address area of the motion management area X is NULL, the display layer is not stored in the corresponding drawing area, so the drawing area remains blank. Specifically, for example, when the data in the address area of the motion management area 10 is NULL, the display layer (in the case of the present invention, the “previous notice F layer” in the drawing area for the motion management area 10 in the virtual drawing space of the VRAM 326 is used. )) is not stored, the drawing area for the motion management area 10 remains blank. It is also possible to sequentially store the display layers so that the non-blank drawing areas are continuous (that is, the display layers are stored while being packed forward), but in that case, one display screen is configured. Since the drawing areas for storing the display layers other than the background layer change depending on the number of display layers to be stored, each time the display layers are stored in the virtual drawing space, the drawing area for storing the display layer (that is, a blank area) is stored. Since it is necessary to search the drawing area on the frontmost (head) side of the drawing areas, the processing becomes complicated accordingly. On the other hand, like the present invention, by configuring each display layer to be stored in a predetermined drawing area regardless of the effect contents (that is, the number of display layers forming one display screen),
Each time the display layer is stored in the virtual drawing space, it is not necessary to search the drawing area for storing the display layer one by one, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The display layers stored in the respective drawing areas are sequentially overlapped in the order of arrangement of the drawing areas from the screen back side (lower layer side) to the screen front side (upper layer side) to create one display screen. Specifically, in the present invention, as shown in FIG. 60, for example, the “background layer” stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 1 located at the beginning of the 12 drawing areas is the deepest in the screen. The "small design layer", which is arranged on the side (bottom layer) and is stored in the drawing area for the motion management area 11 located at the end of the 12 drawing areas, is arranged on the foremost side (top layer) of the screen. To be done.

In such an effect control, when an effect screen (display screen) is generated, it is divided into a plurality of display layers (scenario layers) corresponding to the display elements of the effect screen and set in advance as a table, and then they are individually set. Are controlled as scenarios and all the scenarios are combined in the form of a display layer to generate a picture on one screen and display it on the display device 41.
In the effect display editing process, the effect control device 300, for example, in the "holding layer", a waiting hold display (decorative special figure start memory display displayed in the waiting hold display section 41b) and a running hold display (execution). And the decorative special figure starting memory display) displayed on the middle hold display section 41c. Also, in the "small symbol layer", a small symbol (identification symbol displayed in the small symbol variable display section 41d) and a number indicating the number of undigested starting memories (a number displayed in the number reservation display section 41e). And to draw.

The background image is an image drawn on the “background layer”. That is, FIGS. 59(a) and 59(b)
In the example shown in (), the illustration of the images drawn in each layer other than the “background layer” is omitted.
The medium brightness image Q is not limited to the one included in the background image. Specifically, the medium-brightness image Q is, for example, an image ((A notice A layer) to (notice F layer) drawn (
It may be a notice image).

Further, the game board 30 configured such that the game balls can flow down in front of the display section of the display device 41 is shown in FIG.
While the left side overlapping area 41L of the display unit as shown in FIG. 1, that is, the left side falling area 32L of the game area 32 is visible, the right side overlapping area 41R of the display section is the right side falling area of the game area 32. It is not limited to the game board 30 which is visible through 32R.
A game board 30 configured such that game balls can flow down in front of the display section of the display device 41 is, for example, shown in FIG.
As shown in (a), the display unit of the display device 41 may cover only one of the left end region and the right end region (here, only the right end region). It is sufficient that the game board 30 has at least a portion (here, the right covering portion) that covers the display portion of the display device 41 made of a transparent material. In the case of the game board 30, since only one of the left end area and the right end area of the display unit of the display device 41 is an overlapping area that overlaps the game board 30 in the front and back, for example, FIG.
As shown in, the ball visibility ensuring color is displayed in at least a part of the overlapping area (here, the right overlapping area 41R).

Further, the game board 30 configured such that the game balls can flow down in front of the display section of the display device 41, for example, as shown in FIG. 62A, receives the game balls flowing down the game area 32 and receives the stage section 32.
It may be the game board 30 to which the warp flow path forming member that forms the warp flow path 32W that guides to S is attached. At least the warp flow path forming member of the game board 30 may be made of a transparent material.
The warp flow path 32W is a tubular flow path having an inner diameter that allows the game balls to flow down in a row, is a part of the game area 32, and opens toward the left play area of the play area 32, and the left side thereof. It is possible to accept game balls flowing down the game area. The upstream side end forms the inflow port of the warp flow path 32W, the downstream side end forms the outflow port of the warp flow path 32W, and the warp flow path 32W displays the game balls flowing from the upstream side end part of the display device 41. After being guided to the front of the display section, it is guided to the left end of the stage section 32S. In the case of the game board 30, for example, as shown in FIG. 62(b), a warp overlap region 41W (FIG. 6) that overlaps the warp flow path 32W of the display section of the display device 41.
The ball visibility ensuring color is displayed in the area surrounded by the one-dot chain line in 2(b).

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 59(a), (b), 61(b), and 62(b), an image simulating lightning is displayed as the medium-brightness image Q. The image Q is not limited to the image simulating lightning and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, the brightness of the display color of the medium brightness image Q may not be uniform. Specifically, the medium brightness image Q
May be, for example, a gradation image in which the brightness changes stepwise within the allowable range.
Further, the display color of the medium-brightness image Q (that is, the ball visibility ensuring color) has an arbitrary hue and saturation as long as the lightness is within the allowable range.
The display position, size, shape, etc. of the medium brightness image Q may or may not be fixed, but a natural image is displayed on the display unit of the display device 41. From the viewpoint of increasing the degree of freedom of the image configuration displayed on the display unit, it is preferable that the image is not fixed.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 59A and 59B, the left overlap region 41L and the right overlap region 41R.
Although the separate medium-brightness image Q is displayed in and, the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, for example, when the display unit of the display device 41 has a plurality of overlapping areas that overlap the game board 30 in the front and rear, a plurality of overlapping areas are displayed by displaying one medium-brightness image Q. The ball visibility ensuring color may be displayed on at least a part of each of the overlapping regions.
Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 59A and 59B, two medium brightness images Q are displayed in the left overlap region 41L, but when a plurality of middle brightness images Q are displayed in one overlap region, It is preferable that the interval between adjacent medium-brightness images Q is equal to or less than one game ball. By setting the interval between adjacent medium-brightness images Q to be equal to or less than one game ball, without interrupting the game ball moving (rolling or flowing down) from one middle-brightness image Q to the other middle-brightness image Q You can continue to check.

Further, although the sphere visibility ensuring color is displayed in at least a part of the overlapping area, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only an image (display screen) displayed on the display device 41 in a predetermined period,
An image (display screen) in which the ball visibility ensuring color is displayed in at least a part of the overlapping area may be used.
Specifically, for example, as in the example shown in FIG. 61, when only a part of the right side game area of the game area 32 (right side flow-down area 32R) overlaps with the display section of the display device 41 in the front and rear, at least the right side. The image (display screen) displayed on the display device 41 in the hitting game state (the game state in which the right hitting is more advantageous than the left hitting) is an image in which the ball visibility ensuring color is displayed in at least a part of the overlapping area. It may be (display screen).
Further, for example, as in the example shown in FIG. 62, when only a part of the left side game area of the game area 32 (warp flow path 32W) overlaps with the display unit of the display device 41 in the front and back, at least the left-handed gaming state. The image (display screen) displayed on the display device 41 in the (playing state in which the left hitting is more advantageous than the right hitting) is the image (display screen) in which the ball visibility ensuring color is displayed in at least a part of the overlapping area. ) Is good.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example, in the gaming machine provided with the gaming board 30 in which the gaming area 32 in which the gaming balls flow down is formed, and the display unit (display device 41) having the display unit, A predetermined game ball downflow area (left downflow area 32L, right downflow area 32 in the game area 32
R, the warp flow path 32W) is located in front of the display unit, and overlaps with a predetermined game ball flow-down region on the display unit in the front and rear (left side overlap region 41L, right side overlap region 41R, warp overlap region 41W). Is visible through the predetermined game ball flow-down area, and at least a part of the overlapping area displays a color (sphere visibility ensuring color) having a brightness equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value (lower threshold value). I chose
Therefore, even if a blackout type effect (that is, an effect of displaying an overall dark image on the display device 41) is performed, the brightness of the gaming ball flowing down in front of the display unit is a predetermined threshold value (lower threshold value). When passing in front of the area where the above colors (sphere visibility ensuring colors) are displayed, the visibility of the game ball flowing down in front of the display is easy because it is not assimilated to the display on the display and is easy to see. Can be secured. Furthermore, by ensuring the visibility of the game ball, it is possible to prevent stop hitting of the game ball (preventing the game ball from being launched because it is difficult to see).
Note that the brightness of the ball visibility ensuring color may be higher than the upper threshold as long as it is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold (lower threshold).

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example, in the gaming machine provided with the gaming board 30 in which the gaming area 32 in which the gaming balls flow down and the display means (display device 41) having the display unit, Predetermined game ball downflow area in the area 32 (left downflow area 32L, right downflow area 32R,
The warp flow path 32W) is located in front of the display unit, and the overlapping regions (left side overlapping region 41L, right side overlapping region 41R, warp overlapping region 41W) that overlap the front and rear of the predetermined game ball falling region on the display unit are A color (sphere visibility ensuring color) whose brightness is less than or equal to a predetermined threshold value (upper threshold value) is displayed in at least a part of the overlapping area, which is visible through the predetermined game ball falling area.
Therefore, even if a whiteout system effect (that is, an effect of displaying an overall bright image on the display device 41) is performed, the brightness of the gaming sphere flowing down in front of the display unit is equal to or lower than a predetermined threshold value (upper threshold value). When passing in front of the area in which the color (sphere visibility ensuring color) is displayed, it is not assimilated to the display on the display section and is easy to see, so the visibility of the game ball flowing down in front of the display section is improved. Can be secured. Furthermore, by ensuring the visibility of the game ball, it is possible to prevent stop hitting of the game ball (preventing the game ball from being launched because it is difficult to see).
Note that the brightness of the ball visibility ensuring color may be lower than the lower threshold as long as it is equal to or lower than a predetermined threshold (upper threshold).

The display means is not limited to the display device 41 and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the display means may be, for example, a display device (sub display device or the like) provided separately from the display device 41, or predetermined information (characters, images, etc.) when light enters from the end face. Alternatively, the light guide plate may be provided with a light emitting pattern formed of fine irregularities by laser processing or the like so that the light guide plate is exposed.
Further, even if the medium brightness image Q is, for example, the expectation degree suggesting image G2 shown in FIGS. good.

<Modification B of game board>
A modified example B of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 78.
FIG. 63 is a front view schematically showing the game board 30 of Modification B.
In the game board 30 of this modified example, the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting winning area)
The difference from the game board 30 of the above-described embodiment and modification is that the out-zone unit 800 including is disposed above the out-port 30a.
In addition, in the game board 30 of this modified example, the normal variation winning device 37 is arranged between the normal symbol starting gate 34 and the special variation winning device 38 in the right side game area of the game area 32. It is different from the game board 30 of the above-mentioned embodiment and the above-mentioned modification.

Further, in the game board 30 of this modification, the main display device 41a is used as the display device 41.
And the sub display device 41b is provided, which is different from the game board 30 of the above-described embodiment and the above-described modification.
The main display device 41a (variable display device) has a configuration in which three 7-segment display devices (variable display regions) in which seven light emitters (segments) are arranged in a figure 8 are lined up. Each light emitter can change the light emission mode (lighting, extinguishing, blinking, emission color, etc.) independently, and by controlling the light emission mode, identification information (special symbol) can be displayed for each 7-segment display. is there. Also, multiple 7
It is also possible to display information by combining segment indicators. This main display device 41a
Then, the decorative special figure variable display game is displayed in which a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols) are variably displayed corresponding to the special figure variable display game and then stopped and displayed. In addition, an effect related to the special figure variation display game can be executed by changing the light emission mode.

The sub display device 41b is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (CRT).
On the display screen of the sub display device 41b, information relating to the game, such as a character that produces the special figure variation display game and a background image that enhances the production effect, is displayed. In addition, the sub display device 41b
On the display screen of, the decoration special figure starting memory display corresponding to the undigested starting memory, images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, big hit display image, fanfare display image, ending display image, etc.) Is displayed.

FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the out-zone unit 800 and is a diagram (front view) viewed from the front side. Further, FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the out-zone unit 800 and is a perspective view seen from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 64 and FIG. 65, the out-zone unit 800 has an inflow port 810 and upper left and right upper production channels 820 arranged at the upper part of the out-zone unit 800, and a central portion of the out-zone unit 800. The middle effect flow path 830 and the right and left sprouting members 840 provided, the lower effect flow path 850 and the outlet (out port) 860 arranged at the lower portion of the out zone unit 800, the middle effect flow path 830 and the lower part. It is provided with a pseudo winning opening 870 and left and right rotating bodies 880 arranged between the effect flow passage 850.

Into the inflow port 810, game balls that have not won any of the plurality of winning regions provided in the gaming region 32 can flow. Therefore, in the present modification, the game balls that do not win the winning area provided in the game area 32 flow into the out port 30a or the inflow port 810 of the out zone unit 800. The position of the outlet 30a can be changed as appropriate, and for example, the outlet 30a may be arranged above the right game area, or the general winning opening 35 (for example, the right general winning opening 35). In addition, the outlet 30a may be arranged in the vicinity of the general winning opening 35) which is integrated with the big winning opening. That is, even if the player does not win the winning area, the game ball may flow down to the ball discharging unit.
The game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 810 is the upper production flow passage 820 on the left side or the upper production flow passage 82 on the right side.
Spills to zero. Specifically, for example, a game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 810 passes through a back surface flow path portion (not shown) arranged on the rear surface side of the out zone unit 800, and becomes a base member of the out zone unit 800. From the provided outlet (not shown) to the out zone unit 8
00 to the upper effect flow passage 820 provided on the front side.

The beating member 840 rotates at a constant speed and guides the game sphere flowing down the upper effect flow path 820 to the middle effect flow path 830 (in a two-dot chain line in FIGS. 64 and 65). State shown),
A second guidance state (state shown by a solid line in FIGS. 64 and 65) for guiding to the lower effect flow passage 850,
Can be converted to.
The game ball guided to the middle effect flow path 830 by the splash member 840 is a pseudo winning opening 870.
, Or falls into the lower effect flow passage 850 before flowing into the pseudo winning opening 870. The game ball that has fallen from the middle effect flow passage 830 to the lower effect flow passage 850 flows into the outflow port 860.
The game ball guided to the lower effect flow passage 850 by the splash member 840 flows into the outlet 860, or is guided to the middle effect flow passage 830 by the rotating body 880 that rotates before flowing into the outlet 860. To be done.

The game ball that has flown into the outlet 860 or the pseudo winning opening 870 is discharged to the discharge unit.
The game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 810 is configured to flow into the outflow port 860 or the pseudo winning port 870 and be discharged. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 810 is configured so as not to be able to return to the outside (game area 32) of the out zone unit 800.

The rotating body 880 is a disk-shaped member, and is arranged in a state where the thickness direction thereof is substantially aligned with the left-right direction. The rotating body 880 rotates in a constant direction (clockwise direction when viewed from the right side in the case of the present modification) about a rotating shaft (not shown) that passes through the center of the rotating body 880 as a center.
The rotating body 880 has a plurality of magnets built therein. This magnet is for attracting (holding in a contact state) the game ball that has come into contact with a magnet placement location (location where the magnet is placed) on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 880. When the game sphere comes into contact with the magnet arrangement portion of the rotating body 880, the game ball is attracted to the magnet arrangement portion and is lifted from the bottom to the top by the rotating body 880 that rotates from the bottom to the top. Is guided from the lower effect flow path 850 located in the upper direction to the intermediate effect flow path 830 located above the rotating body 880.

It should be noted that, from the viewpoint of facilitating attraction of the game ball to the magnet arrangement portion of the rotating body 880, suppressing wobbling of the game ball attracted to the magnet arrangement portion of the rotating body 880, and the like, of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 880. An indented recess may be formed at a position corresponding to the magnet arrangement position. Further, not the magnet but the ball receiving member such as a dish for lifting the game ball is provided as the rotating body 88.
It may be set to 0. Further, instead of the rotating body 880, a raising member that operates like an elevator may be provided. That is, the out zone unit 800 may be provided with a member that displaces the game ball.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 66, an entry prevention wall 890 (or a plurality of nails) that prevents game balls from entering the out-zone unit 800 from the side of the honey member 840 at a position outside the honey member 840. Or a protrusion-shaped obstacle member made of resin or the like) may be provided.

The game ball that has flown into the pseudo winning opening 870 is detected by a pseudo winning opening switch (not shown). The detection signal of the pseudo winning opening switch is output to the effect control device 300, and when the pseudo winning opening switch detects a game ball, the effect control device 300 is configured to execute a predetermined effect.
In this modification, the pseudo winning opening 870 is an assist starting opening, and when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870, the assist symbol effect is executed. Here, "assist design effect" means
After a plurality of assist symbols (identification information) are variably displayed on the sub display device 41b, stop display is performed,
This is an effect in which the stop-displayed assist symbol (hereinafter referred to as "assist stop symbol") is involved in the decorative special figure variable display game on the main display device 41a.

67 to 73 are diagrams for explaining the assist symbol effect of this modification. The assist symbol effect of this modified example is composed of an assist symbol variation effect and an assist symbol replacement effect, and the display device 4
1 (main display device 41a and sub display device 41b).
First, when the special figure variation display game (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo winning special figure game") that is being executed when the game balls flow into the pseudo winning opening 870 is a special figure variation display game with reach effect. The assist symbol effect executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68.
When the special winning prize game at the time of pseudo prize accompanies the reach effect, the assist symbol variation effect and the assist symbol replacement effect are executed during the special prize prize game at the time of pseudo winning.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 67(a), in the main display device 41a, a first symbol (first special symbol), a second symbol (second special symbol), and a third symbol (third special symbol) When the game ball wins the pseudo winning opening 870 while the variable display of) is being executed, the assist symbol variation effect of the assist symbol effect is executed. In the assist symbol variation effect, for example, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 7(b), in each of the two left and right assist symbol variable display areas of the sub-display device 41b, variable display of assist symbols composed of numbers or the like is started, and after a predetermined time,
For example, as shown in FIG. 67(c), the variable display of the assist symbol is stopped and the assist stop symbol is displayed. 67 to 73, a circle displayed in the upper right of the sub display device 41b is a decorative special figure starting memory display (standby pending display) corresponding to the undigested starting memory.

In this case, the same reach symbol as the reach symbol derived in the pseudo winning special game is displayed as the assist stop symbol. The reach symbol derived in the pseudo prize special map game is, for example, the stop symbol of the pseudo prize special map game determined at the start of the pseudo prize special map game (step of the fluctuating effect setting process (FIG. 77)). It can be specified based on C522). Specifically, for example, when the stop symbol of the pseudo prize winning special game is determined to be "757", for example, "77" is displayed as the assist stop symbol as shown in FIG. 67(c). R.

Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(a), the variable display of two of the first to third symbols (the first symbol and the second symbol in this example) is stopped, and the remaining one (this example) Then, when only the third symbol) is variably displayed, the assist symbol replacement effect of the assist symbol effect is executed. In the assist symbol replacement effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(b), the assist stop symbol is displayed in an enlarged manner, and then, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(c), it is stopped and displayed among the first to third symbols. The two (1st symbol and 2nd symbol in this example) which are doing are replaced by the assist stop symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 68, “76” is replaced with “77”. And
When the assist stop symbol moves from the sub display device 41b to the main display device 41a, the assist symbol effect is ended and the reach effect is started.
In this way, in the assist design effect of this modified example, when the assist stop design is aligned in the assist design variation production, it is as if the assist stop design assists the reach occurrence in the subsequent assist design replacement production. I can show you.

Next, in the case where the pseudo-winning special figure game is not the special figure variation display game accompanied by the reach effect, the special figure variation corresponding to the special figure starting memory not yet digested when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870. The assist symbol effect executed when the special game variation display game with reach effect is included in the display game will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71.
If the special prize game at the time of pseudo winning is not accompanied by the reach effect, and if the game accompanied by the reach effect is included in the undigested special figure change display game, the assist symbol during the special prize game at the time of pseudo winning The variation effect is executed, and the assist symbol replacement effect is executed during the special figure variation display game (special figure variation display game with reach effect) that is performed after the pseudo winning special figure game. That is, one assist symbol effect is executed over a plurality of special figure variation display games.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG.
If the game ball wins in the pseudo winning opening 870 while the variable display of the third symbol is being executed,
The assist symbol variation effect of the assist symbol effect is executed. In the assist symbol fluctuation effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 69(b), the variable display of the assist symbol is started, and after a predetermined time, for example, as shown in FIG. 69(c), the assist stop symbol is displayed.
In this case, as the assist stop symbol, an uncertain variation reach symbol is displayed among the reach symbols in which the two symbols are aligned. Specifically, for example, odd-numbered symbols (“1”, “3”) among the identification symbols
, “5”, “7”) are probability variation symbols, and even symbols (“2”, “4”, “of the identification symbols)
6", "8") is a non-probable variation symbol, "22", "44" as the assist stop symbol
“,” “66”, or “88” is set.

The reach symbol derived in the special figure variation display game (special figure variation display game with reach effect) that is performed after the pseudo winning special figure game is determined, for example, at the start of the particular figure variation display game. It can be specified based on the stop symbol of the special figure variation display game (see step C522 of variation effect setting process (FIG. 77)). During the pseudo-winning special map game, since the stop symbol of the special-drawing variation display game that is performed after the pseudo-winning special map game is not determined, the pseudo-winning special map game is stopped during the pseudo-winning special map game. In the special figure variation display game (special figure variation display game with reach effect) that is performed after the time special figure game, a probability variation reach pattern is derived (the probability variation pattern reaches the reach) or an uncertain variation reach pattern It is unclear whether is derived (reach with uncertain variation). Therefore, in this modified example, in order to prevent the interest of the game from being deteriorated, in this case, an uncertain variation reach symbol is displayed as the assist stop symbol.

After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 70A, the special winning prize game is ended, and as shown in FIG. 70B, the special figure variation display game with reach effect is started, for example, as shown in FIG.
As shown in (c), two of the first to third symbols (in this example, the first symbol and the second symbol)
When the variable display is stopped and only the remaining one (the third symbol in this example) is variably displayed, the assist symbol replacement effect of the assist symbol effect is executed. In the assist symbol replacement effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 71(a), the assist stop symbol is displayed in an enlarged manner, and then, for example, as shown in FIG. 71(b), it is stopped and displayed among the first to third symbols. The two that have been replaced with the assist stop design. In the example shown in FIG. 71, “76” is replaced with “44”. Then, the assist stop design is changed from the sub display device 41b to the main display device 4
When the process proceeds to 1a, the assist symbol effect is finished and the reach effect is started.

Therefore, if the assist stop symbol and the reach symbol derived in the special symbol variation display game (special symbol variation display game with reach effect) performed after the pseudo winning special symbol game are different, for example, the figure As shown in 71(c), the assist stop symbol displayed on the main display device 41a is replaced with the reach symbol derived in the special symbol variable display game. In the example shown in FIG. 71, “44” is replaced with “77”.
As described above, in the assisted design effect of this modification, the special prize game at the time of pseudo winning does not include the reach effect, and the undigested special figure change display game includes the game with the reach effect. In this case, the assist stop symbols can be left in the aligned state until the special figure variation display game that is performed after the pseudo winning special figure game. As a result, it is possible to continue the expectation of the reach occurrence over a plurality of special figure variation display games, so that it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Next, in the case where the pseudo-winning special figure game is not the special figure variation display game accompanied by the reach effect, the special figure variation corresponding to the special figure starting memory not yet digested when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870. The assist symbol effect executed when the special game variation display game with reach effect is not included in the display game will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73.
If the special prize game during pseudo winning is not accompanied by a reach effect, and if the undigested special figure change display game does not include a game accompanied by a reach effect, assist during the special prize game during pseudo prize winning. Only the symbol variation effect is executed, and the assist symbol effect ends as it is. That is, in this case, the assist symbol replacement effect is not executed.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG.
If the game ball wins in the pseudo winning opening 870 while the variable display of the third symbol is being executed,
The assist symbol variation effect of the assist symbol effect is executed. In the assist symbol variation effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 72(b), variation display of the assist symbol is started, and after a predetermined time, for example, as shown in FIG. 72(c), the assist stop symbol is displayed. In this case, as the assist stop symbol, a non-reach symbol in which the two symbols are not aligned is displayed.
Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 73(a), when the pseudo winning special figure game ends, the assist symbol effect ends, and the assist stop symbol disappears, for example, as shown in FIG. 73(b). Therefore, during the special figure variation display game to be performed after the pseudo winning special figure game,
When the game ball wins the pseudo winning opening 870 again, a new assist symbol effect is started, for example, as shown in FIG. 73(c).

In this way, in the assist symbol variation effect of this modified example, a reach symbol in which two symbols are aligned as the assist symbol is displayed, and a non-reach symbol in which the two symbols are not aligned as the assist symbol. There are two effect modes, that is, "mode without reach" in which is displayed. Then, the presence/absence of the reach effect can be notified (indicated) by the effect mode of the assist symbol variation effect.

[Main processing]
In order to execute the assist symbol effect, the effect control device 300 of the present modification executes the main process shown in FIG. 74 instead of the main process shown in FIG. 32.
In the main process of this modification, an assist symbol control process (step C31) is executed between the hall/player setting mode process (step C10) and the random number updating process (step C11).

[Assist symbol control processing]
FIG. 75 shows the assist symbol control process (step C31) in the above-mentioned main process. In the assist symbol control process, first, it is determined whether the pseudo winning opening switch has detected a game ball (step C401).
When it is determined in step C401 that the pseudo winning opening switch does not detect a game ball (
Step C401; N), that is, if the game ball does not flow into the pseudo winning opening 870, the assist symbol control process is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C401 that the pseudo winning opening switch has detected a game ball (
(Step C401; Y), that is, when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870, it is determined whether the replacement effect standby flag is set (step C402).

In step C402, if it is determined that the replacement effect standby flag is set (step C402; Y), that is, the special figure variation display game that is performed after the pseudo winning special figure game with the assist stop symbols being aligned. If it remains up to, the assist symbol control process is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C402 that the replacement effect standby flag is not set (step C402; N), then it is determined whether the P machine state is changing to the special map (step C).
403).
When it is determined in step C403 that the special figure is not changing (step C403; N), the assist symbol control process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step C403 that the special figure is changing (step C403; Y
), it is determined whether the assist symbol variation effect of the assist symbol effects can be executed (step C404). Specifically, for example, during the first half fluctuation in the pseudo prize special game, and when the remaining time of the first half fluctuation is equal to or greater than a predetermined first threshold value, the assist symbol fluctuation effect can be executed. Judge that there is. Here, the predetermined first threshold value can be set as appropriate, but in the present modification, [1] the execution time of the assist symbol variation effect can be secured (in this variation example, the assist symbol variation effect is at the time of pseudo winning). Start in the middle of the first half fluctuation in the special figure game and end in the middle of the first half fluctuation), [2] secure processing time for replacing part of the effect of the pseudo prize special effect game with the assist symbol effect A value that satisfies both of the two conditions of being able to be set is set.
The information of the first-half fluctuation is included in the MODE, and the effect control device 300 can set the content of the first-half fluctuation, the time of the first-half fluctuation, and the like based on this MODE.
Further, the information on the latter half variation such as the presence/absence of the reach and the type of the reach is included in the ACT, and the effect control device 300 can set the content of the latter half variation based on the ACT.

When it is determined in step C404 that the assist symbol variation effect cannot be executed (step C404; N), the assist symbol control process is ended.
On the other hand, in step C404, when it is determined that the assist symbol variation effect can be executed (
In step C404; Y), it is determined whether or not the variation during digestion (the special figure variation display game being executed, here is the pseudo-winning special figure game) is the special figure variation display game with the reach effect (step C405). ..

When it is determined in step C405 that the variation during digestion is a special figure variation display game with reach effect (step C405; Y), the content of the assist symbol variation effect (reach presence mode) is determined (step C406). .. As a result, the execution time of the assist symbol variation effect, the assist stop symbol, and the like are determined.
Then, based on the content determined in step C406, the display setting of the assist symbol variation effect is performed (step C407). As a result, the variable display of the assist symbol is started, and the assist symbol variable effect (see FIGS. 67(b) and 67(c)) in which the assist stop symbol is displayed after a predetermined time can be executed.

Next, the content of the assist symbol replacement effect is determined with reference to the content of the assist symbol variation effect determined in step C406, the content of the effect in the in-digest variation that is currently displayed and set (step C408). From this, the execution time of the assist symbol replacement effect, the replacement timing of the assist stop symbol, and the like are determined. Here, the content of the effect in the in-digestion variation that is currently set to be displayed is, for example, the content of the variation effect that is set to be displayed in step C523 of the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 77) related to the in-digestion variation, or step C5.
The contents of the notice effect displayed and set in 24, the contents of the decorative special figure variation effect (display special figure variation display game) displayed and set in step C527, and the like.

Next, based on the content determined in step C408, the display setting of the assist symbol replacement effect is performed (step C409). As a result, at least a part of the effect of the variation during digestion (pseudo prize special game at the time of pseudo winning) is replaced with the assist symbol replacement effect, so that the non-reach symbol is stopped and displayed on the main display device 41a during the variation during digestion. The assist stop symbol is enlarged and displayed, and the assist symbol replacement effect (see FIGS. 68(a) to 68(c)) in which the non-reach symbol on the main display device 41a is replaced with the assist stop symbol can be executed.

When it is determined in step C405 that the variation during digestion is not the special figure variation display game with reach effect (step C405; N), undigested variation (special figure variation corresponding to undigested special figure starting memory). It is determined whether or not the display game, in this case, the special figure variation display game that is performed after the pseudo winning special figure game) includes the special figure variation display game with the reach effect (
Step C410). Whether or not the special figure variation display game with reach effect is included in the undigested variation can be determined based on, for example, a look-ahead result from the game control device 100. Here, the look-ahead result is a determination result of the result-related information (whether or not it is a big hit or the type of the variation pattern) corresponding to the starting memory, which is earlier than the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding starting memory. Is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300.

If it is determined in step C410 that the special figure variation display game with reach effect is not included in the undigested variation (step C410; N), the content of the assist symbol variation effect (without reach mode) is determined. Then, (step C411), based on the determined contents, the display setting of the assist symbol variation effect is performed (step C412). As a result, the variable display of the assist symbol is started, and after a predetermined time, the assist stop symbol is displayed.
72(b) and 72(c)) can be executed, and the assist symbol effect ends without execution of the assist symbol replacement effect (see FIGS. 73(a) and 73(b)).

On the other hand, in step C410, when it is determined that the unillustrated variation includes the special figure variation display game with the reach effect (step C410; Y), the assist symbol variation effect is in the reach mode. A lottery mode lottery process (step C413) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to make a decision is made to determine whether or not the lottery has been won (step C414).
..
In step C414, when it is determined that the player has not won (step C414; N), that is, when it is determined that the effect mode of the assist symbol variation effect is the reachless mode, the process proceeds to step C411. As described above, in this modified example, even if the special figure variation display game accompanied by the reach effect is included in the undigested variation, the pseudo prize is won if the reach mode lottery is not won. Only the assist symbol variation effect is executed during the time special figure game, and the assist symbol effect ends as it is. That is, when the assist symbol variation effect of the mode with reach is executed, the assist symbol replacement effect is executed thereafter, while when the assist symbol variation effect of the mode without reach is executed, after that, The assist symbol replacement effect is not executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step C414 that the player has won (step C414; Y), that is, if it is determined that the effect mode of the assist symbol variation effect is to be in the reach mode, the assist symbol variation effect (reach mode) The content is determined (step C415), and the display setting of the assist symbol variation effect is performed based on the determined content (step C416). As a result, the variable display of the assist symbol is started, and the assist symbol variable effect in which the assist stop symbol is displayed after a predetermined time (see FIGS. 69(b) and (c)) can be executed.
Next, the substitution effect standby flag is set (step C417), and the assist symbol control process is ended. Thereby, in the special figure variation display game (special figure variation display game with reach effect) performed after the pseudo winning special figure game, the non-reach symbol is stopped and displayed on the main display device 41a, and the assist stop symbol is displayed. The non-reach symbol of the main display device 41a is enlarged and replaced with the assist stop symbol, and if necessary, the assist stop symbol displayed on the main display device 41a is replaced (replaced with the actual reach symbol).
The assist symbol replacement effect (see FIG. 70(c) and FIGS. 71(a) to 71(c)) can be executed.

[Variable command processing]
The received command check processing in the main processing (see FIG. 74) of this modification is the same as the received command check processing (see FIG. 33) of the above embodiment. Further, the received command analysis processing in the received command check processing of this modification is the same as the received command analysis processing (see FIG. 34) of the above embodiment.

In FIG. 76, the variable system command processing in the received command analysis processing (step C236)
showed that. In this variable command processing, it is first determined whether the special figure classification is undetermined (
Step C501). The special map type is information indicating whether the special map type is special map 1 or special map 2,
This is information set in the above-described symbol-based command processing.
If the special figure type is not determined (step C501; Y), the variable system command processing is ended. If the special figure type is not undetermined (step C501; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, the combination of the variable command and the symbol command is checked (
(Step C502), it is determined whether or not the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (Step C
503).

If the variable command and the symbol type are not compatible (step C503; Y), the variable command processing ends. If the variable command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C5)
03; N) discriminates the fluctuation pattern type from the fluctuation command (step C504). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, outlying symbols, 16R probability variation A jackpot symbols, 16R probability variation B jackpot symbols, 16R normal A jackpot symbols, 16R normal B jackpot symbols, 8R probability variation jackpot symbols, etc. is there. When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent, even if the variation command (variation pattern command) out of sync is received, the production is performed as if the symbol command of the 16R probability variation A jackpot symbol was received. Combination that conflicts with the above (
It means that it is a combination of variable command and symbol type).

In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C504), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, a variation effect setting process for setting information for performing an effect according to the variation command is performed (step C505).

Next, the special figure changing state is set as the P machine state (state of the pachinko machine) (step C506).
). Here, the state of changing the special map indicates that the special map is changing (not during a customer waiting demonstration, a big hit, or a fanfare). Furthermore, if the number of pre-reading effects (the number of pre-reading executions) is not zero, the number of pre-reading effects is updated by -1 (processing to reduce the number of pre-reading effects by 1) (step C507), and the variable system command processing is ended.

[Variation effect setting process]
FIG. 77 shows the variation effect setting process (step C505) in the above-described variation system command process.
)showed that. In this variation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern type is variation without reach (step C511). When the fluctuation pattern type is fluctuation without reach (
A step C511; Y) sets a first-half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special map type, and the effect mode (step C512). In addition, since there is no reach variation, the symbol type is always an outlier symbol, and it is not necessary to specifically refer to the symbol type here.
Here, the effect mode corresponds to the game mode managed by the effect control device 300 and naturally varies depending on the model, but in the present modification, there are a normal mode, a probability variation mode, a time saving mode, and the like. Further, a plurality of modes are provided in which the distribution ratio of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41 (main display device 41a) are different in each mode.

Next, referring to the first-half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of MODEs and special figure types to be reserved is acquired (step C513).
.. Accordingly, in the case of a change without reach, it is possible to change the lottery contents (specifically, the appearance rate of each notice effect mode) of the notice effect that appears during each change according to the number of reserves. After that, the first-half notice distribution group table is used to perform the lottery for the notice that appears during the first-half change (step C516).

On the other hand, when the variation pattern type is not reachless variation (step C511; N), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, and the symbol type is set (step C514).
Then, referring to the first-half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the variation pattern type is acquired (step C515).
, The first half notice distribution group table is used to perform a lottery for notices that appear during the first half change (step C516).

Next, the notice production of the latter half fluctuation is drawn. The latter half of the special figure change display game is a so-called reach action (for example, a special result mode (a combination of special symbols) in which the display area excluding the specific area among the display areas of a plurality of columns of the special figure becomes a big hit. This is a variable display in a state where the display is stopped and the variable display is performed only in the specific area. On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is a fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.

First, the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type is set (step C517). The latter half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting an address of the latter half notice distribution group table.
Then, by referring to the second-half notice distribution group address table, the address of the second-half notice distribution group table corresponding to ACT is acquired (step C518), and the second-half notice distribution group table is used to change the second half (during reach). A lottery for advance notice will be made (Step C51
9).

Next, the contents of the effect corresponding to the result of the advance notice lottery performed in steps C516 and C519 are determined (step C520), and the contents of the variable effect corresponding to MODE and ACT are determined (step C521). As a result, an effect such as a variation time of the decorative special figure variation display game and main reach contents and a notice are decided.
Next, the stop symbol setting process for determining the stop symbol that constitutes the result mode of the decorative special map variable display game is performed by also referring to the determined variation pattern (reach effect, etc.) of the special symbol variable display game and the notice content ( Step C522).

Next, the display setting of the variable effect is set based on the content of the variable effect determined in step C521 (step C523), and the display setting of the notice effect is set based on the content of the effect determined in step C520 (step C524). .. By these processes, the effect and advance notice in the decorative special figure variable display game set as described above can be executed.
Then, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C525). In this process, the setting for reducing the decoration special figure start memory display is made in response to the decrease in the start memory accompanying the start of the special figure variation display game.

Next, a voice number indicating the type of BGM output from the speakers 19a and 19b and a decoration number indicating the type of effect produced by a decoration lamp or the like are set (step C526), and the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure type is set. Display settings are made (step C527).
Next, in addition to the decorative special figure variable display game (variable display game displayed by the first to third symbols on the display device 41 (main display device 41a)), the variation displayed by the fourth symbol on the information display device 48. In order to execute the display game, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special figure classification is performed (step C528).
Next, effect replacement processing (step C529) is performed, and the variable effect setting processing ends.

[Production replacement processing]
FIG. 78 shows the effect replacement process (step C529) in the above-described variable effect setting process. In this effect replacement process, first, it is determined whether the replacement effect standby flag is set (step C531).
If it is determined in step C531 that the replacement effect standby flag is not set (step C531; N), the effect replacement process is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C531 that the replacement effect standby flag is set (
(Step C531; Y), that is, in a state where the assist stop symbols are aligned, if the special figure variation display game that is performed after the pseudo winning special figure game remains, the variation pattern type is reach variation. It is determined whether or not (step C532).
In step C532, when it is determined that there is no reach variation, (step C532; N)
To finish, the production replacement process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is reach variation in step C532 (step C532).
; Y), the content of the assist symbol replacement effect with reference to the assist stop symbol currently displayed on the sub display device 41b, the content of the effect set to be displayed and set in the most recent step C523, C524, C527, etc. Is determined (step C533), and display setting of the assist symbol replacement effect is performed based on the determined content (step C534). As a result, at least a part of the effect set to be displayed and set in the most recent step C523, C524, C527 or the like is replaced with the assist symbol replacement effect, so that the special symbol variation display game (which is performed after the pseudo winning special symbol game ( In the special figure variation display game with reach effect), the main display device 4
The non-reach symbol is stopped and displayed on 1a, the assist stop symbol is enlarged and displayed, the non-reach symbol on the main display device 41a is replaced with the assist stop symbol, and if necessary, the assist displayed on the main display device 41a. The assist symbol replacement effect (see FIG. 70C and FIGS. 71A to 71C) in which the stop symbol is replaced (replaced with the actual reach symbol) can be executed.
Next, the replacement effect standby flag is cleared (step C535), and the effect replacement process is ended.

In this modified example, when the pseudo-winning special figure game is a special figure variation display game with reach effect, the assist symbol variation effect with the reach mode is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, when the special prize game during pseudo winning is a special figure variation display game with reach effect, if the reach mode lottery process is performed and the reach mode lottery is won, the assist symbol variation of the reach mode is achieved. It is also possible to execute the effect and execute the assist symbol variation effect in the reach-free mode when the reach mode lottery is not won.
Further, the special prize variation display game in which the special winning prize game is a special feature variation display game with reach effect, and the special feature variation display game corresponding to the unfinished special feature starting memory at the time when the game ball flows into the dummy winning port 870. If the special figure variation display game with reach effect is included in, the assist symbol replacement effect may be executed during the pseudo winning special figure game, or after the pseudo winning special figure game. The assist symbol replacement effect may be executed during the special figure variation display game (special figure variation display game with reach effect).

Further, in the present modification, even if the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870, if the predetermined condition is satisfied (in the case of the present modification, the [1] replacement effect standby flag is not set,
[2] P machine state is changing special map, [3] Assist symbol variation effect can be executed, only when all three conditions are satisfied), execute the assist symbol effect corresponding to the inflow However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870 while the predetermined condition is not established, execution of the assist symbol effect corresponding to the inflow is suspended and the predetermined condition is established. After that, it is also possible to configure to execute the assist symbol effect corresponding to the inflow. Further, when the execution of the assist symbol effect is suspended, the suspension number (assist suspension number) may be displayed on the sub display device 41b so as to be distinguishable from the decorative special figure starting memory display.

In addition, the assist symbol production is not limited to the production of notifying (suggesting) the presence or absence of the reach production by the assist stop design, and productions other than the reach production (SP reach development production, round promotion production, pseudo continuous variation). It may be an effect of notifying (suggesting) the occurrence of (effect etc.) by an assist stop design.
Further, the assist symbol effect is not limited to the effect of notifying the presence/absence of occurrence of a predetermined effect by the assist stop symbol, and can be appropriately changed. The assist symbol effect may be, for example, an effect in which the assist stop symbol is reflected in a predetermined notice effect executed in a region other than the assist symbol variable display area of the sub display device 41b.

In addition, in the present modified example, the assist symbol effect is executed when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning port 870, but the effect executed when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning port 870 is limited to the assist symbol effect. Instead, it can be changed appropriately. For example, when a game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870, it is possible to execute an effect of operating a predetermined movable body (for example, the bead member 840 and/or the rotating body 880).
In addition, a state where a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the case of this modification, [1] replacement effect standby flag is not set, [2] P machine state is changing special map, [3] assist symbol change effect When all the three conditions are satisfied), the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870, the assist symbol effect corresponding to the inflow is executed, and the predetermined condition is not satisfied. When the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870 in the state, instead of the assist symbol effect corresponding to the inflow, an effect other than the assist symbol effect (for example, an effect of operating a predetermined movable body) is executed. It is also possible to configure.

It is also possible to configure the game ball to flow into the pseudo winning opening 870 only when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, for example, a ball storage device that can be converted into a first state in which the game balls are stored and a second state in which the game balls are not stored is provided at an appropriate location in the out-zone unit 800. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the sphere storage device is converted from the first state to the second state, and the game sphere stored in the sphere storage device may be made to flow into the pseudo winning opening 870. It is possible.

Further, in the present modification, the assist stop symbol is changed from the sub display device 41b to the main display device 41.
After shifting to a (see FIG. 68(c), FIG. 71(b), (c)), before or after the start or end of the assist symbol effect (see FIG. 67(a) or FIG. 73(b)), Although the assist symbol variation display area of the sub display device 41b is blank (blank), it is not limited to this. In the assist symbol variation display area after the assist stop symbol is transferred to the main display device 41a or when the assist symbol effect is not executed, for example, a display mode in which the latest assist stop symbol is different from the normal display mode (for example, , A color that is lighter than usual), a default assist symbol (for example, "00" or "--", or an assist symbol when the power is turned on) may be displayed, or "tiger" Character images such as “,” “pig,” and “cow” may be displayed.

Further, when the model designation command is received, the display (design, image, etc.) corresponding to the model designation command may be displayed in the assist symbol variation display area of the sub display device 41b. A display corresponding to the model designation command may be displayed on the main display device 41a, but since the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed on the main display device 41a, the display corresponding to the model designation command is displayed on the sub display device 41b. It is preferable to display.
In addition, the assist stop design is a predetermined combination (for example, "tiger tiger", "pig beef", "7 tiger", "
11”, “Renren”, “Storage”, etc.), notification of the degree of expectation, execution/suggestion of a pending change notice, execution/suggestion of a pseudo-repetitive staging, mini-game (result of mini-game) May be performed to notify the occurrence of the reach, the change in the hold, and the occurrence of the pseudo continuous). That is, the assist stop symbol may not be directly acted on the decorative special figure variable display game of the main display device 41a, but may be indirectly acted through the effect related to the special figure variable display game. The variable display of the assist symbol may be related to the general-purpose game or the general-purpose game itself.

Further, in this modification, the variable display of the assist symbol is stopped during the variable display of the first to third symbols (
Although it is configured to display the assist stop symbol), the invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 79, after the non-reach symbol is stopped and displayed on the main display device 41a (of the first to third symbols). It is also possible to stop the variable display of the assist symbol (display the assist stop symbol) when the two variable indicators are stopped and only the other one is in the variable indicator.
Further, in the present modification, the assist special symbols are applied to the decorative special figure variable display game by forming a predetermined combination, but the opposite may be applied. Specifically, for example, a reach occurs in the decorative special figure variable display game on the main display device 41a, and the reach pattern is displayed on the sub display device 4
You may move to 1b and perform the effect which fits in the assist symbol fluctuation|variation display area of the said sub-display apparatus 41b. In this case, an effect using all three 7-segment displays of the main display device 41a can be executed. That is, the assist pattern of the sub display device 41b and the main display device 41a
Interact with each other, part of the result of the decorative special figure variable display game (for example, reach pattern) is a main display device 41a (first display area) and sub display device 41b (second display area)
It should be possible to go back and forth.
In addition, the assist symbol effect is not generated by the sub display device 41b, for example, by a light emitting device (LED
Etc.) or both the sub display device 41b and the light emitting device (dot LED).

Thus, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, the winning area (general winning opening 35, starting winning opening 3
6, the regular variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39), and the out area (out zone unit 80) into which game balls that do not win can flow into the winning area.
0), and a specific game using the game balls that have flowed into the out area in the out area (in the case of this modification, whether the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870 or not). When it is determined that the specific game mechanism for playing the game) and the result of the specific game have reached a predetermined result,
The production control means (production control device 300) capable of executing a predetermined production (in the case of this modification, an assist symbol production) is provided.

Therefore, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced while maintaining the fairness and fairness of the game.
Specifically, since a specific game (game ball effect) can be played in the out area (out zone unit 800), the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, the specific game (game ball effect) is an effect using the game ball that has flowed into the out area (out zone unit 800), and is not an effect using the game ball that may win the winning area. The fairness and fairness of the game can be maintained.
Note that the specific game is not a game played in the out area, that is, a game using the game balls that have flowed into the out area, but a winning area (general winning opening 35, starting winning opening 36, normal variation winning device 37, first special winning device). A game performed in the variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39, etc.),
That is, it may be a game using the game balls that have flowed into the winning area. An example of a case where the specific game is a game played in the winning area, that is, a game using the game balls that have flowed into the winning area will be described in Modification C to be described later.

Further, in this modification, the inlet (inlet 8) to the out area (out zone unit 800) is provided.
10) is provided below the winning area (the starting winning opening 36 in the case of this modification) on the most downstream side of the plurality of winning areas, and has a wider acceptance width of game balls than the winning area. Can be configured as follows.
With this configuration, it is possible to play the specific game using the game balls that have lost the chance of winning the prize. A game ball that does not win the prize area has no chance of winning, giving the player a useless image or a lost image, but by playing a specific game using the game ball that has no chance of winning, It is possible to make it difficult to give such a bad image to the player.

In addition, in the present modification, the specific game mechanism uses the pseudo winning opening 870 and the game ball as the pseudo winning opening 8
The movable member (in the case of the present modification, the blade member 840 and the rotating body 880) that guides to 70 are provided, and the movable member (in the case of the present modification, the rotating body 880) is provided with a magnet for attracting game balls. , It is possible to lift by rotating the game ball attracted to the magnet, the effect control means (effect control device 300), the result of the specific game is a predetermined result when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870. It can be configured so that it can be determined that

With this configuration, the game ball is placed in the out area (out zone unit 800
), the interest in a specific game (game ball production) can be enhanced.
Further, the specific game is an effect using the game balls that have flowed into the out area (out zone unit 800), and is not an effect using the game balls that may win the winning area.
As a specific game, an effect that cannot be performed using a game ball that may win the prize area, for example, a movable member (rotating member 880) lifts the game ball against gravity as in this modification. It is possible to perform various effects.
The movable member is not limited to the bead member 840 and the rotating body 880, and can be changed as appropriate. The movable member may be, for example, a ball storage device that can be converted into a first state in which game balls are stored and a second state in which game balls are not stored. A movable member that can guide the game ball to a specific area may be diverted.

Further, in the present modification, the effect control means (effect control device 300) variably displays a plurality of identification information in the first display area (in the case of the present modification, the main display device 41a) based on the establishment of the start condition. The variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) can be executed, and as the predetermined effect, the second display area different from the first display area (in the case of this modification, the sub display device 41b).
), it is possible to perform an effect (assist symbol effect) in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed.

With this configuration, the game balls that have flowed into the out area (out zone unit 800) can make it appear as if the variable display game was executed.
It is possible to give the player an image in which the identification information is constantly changing without a useless ball, and the playability is improved.
In the case of this modification, the main display device 41a is provided with the first display area, and the sub-display device 4a is provided.
Although the second display area is provided in 1b, that is, the first display area and the second display area are provided in different display devices, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first display area and the second display area are the same. It may be provided in the display device.

Further, in the present modification, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is stopped and displayed in the first display area (main display device 41a in the case of the present modification) with a part of the identification information being collected. When a reach state in which the remaining identification information is variably displayed occurs, a predetermined effect (in the case of the present modification) is displayed in the second display area (in the case of the present modification, the sub display device 41b) before the reach state occurs. , Assist design effect), the display is stopped and displayed in a state where the identification information is complete (FIG. 68(a)).
Etc.), a part of the identification information in the first display area (identification information that is stopped and displayed in a state that is not aligned), identification information that is stopped and displayed in a state that is aligned in the second display area (assist stop pattern) ), a reach state can be generated (see FIG. 68(c), etc.).
With this configuration, the second display area (in the case of the present modification, the sub display device 41
The identification information (assist stop pattern) stopped and displayed in b) can be made to appear as if assisting the reach generation, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

Further, in the present modification, the effect control means (effect control device 300) causes the second display area in the variable display game executed before the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in which the reach state occurs. (In the case of this modification, when the stop display is performed on the sub display device 41b with the identification information gathered, the identification information is gathered in the second display area until the variable display game in which the reach state occurs. It can be configured to continue the stop display (FIGS. 69 to 71).
reference).
With such a configuration, it is possible to continue the expectation of the reach occurrence over a plurality of variable display games, and thus it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Further, in the present modification, the effect control means (effect control device 300) enlargedly displays the identification information stopped and displayed in the state of being aligned with the second display area (in the case of the present modification, the sub display device 41b). After that, by replacing the identification information that is stopped and displayed in a state where it is not aligned in the first display area (the main display device 41a in the case of this modification) with the identification information that is enlarged and displayed in the second display area, It can be configured to generate a reach state (FIG. 68(b).
), (c), etc.).
By configuring in this way, the identification information (assist stop symbol) stopped and displayed in the second display area is enlarged, and a part of the identification information stopped and displayed in the first display area (non-reach symbol) ) Can be skipped (pushed away) to make it appear as if a reach state had been generated, which improves the fun of the game.

Further, in the present modification, after the production control means (production control device 300) stops and displays some identification information in the first display area (main display device 41a in the case of the present variation), it is not complete. The second display area (in the case of this modification, the sub display device 41b) can be configured to stop and display with the identification information gathered (see FIG. 79).
With such a configuration, a loser revival effect can be performed, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 of the present modification executes the game (special figure variation display game) based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and is advantageous for the player when the result of the game is a special result. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state, a display device (sub-display device 41b) capable of displaying a predetermined moving image, and an effect control means (effect control device 3 that can control effects related to the game).
00) and the effect control means, based on that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has flown into the pseudo winning opening 870 of the out zone unit 800), the first effect (for example, assist). The symbol effect) is executed, and the second effect is executed in response to the result of the first effect being a specific result (for example, the assist stop symbol is a predetermined combination). The third effect (for example, SP reach effect) may be configured to be executable when the number of times the result is a specific result is equal to or greater than a predetermined number.
With such a configuration, it is possible to execute an effective effect.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 80, the out area (out zone unit 800)
When the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 870, the assist symbol effect is executed, and the accumulated image corresponding to the number of times the assist stop symbol has become a predetermined combination (the number of specific results) is displayed on the sub display device 4
1b, and when the number of times the assist stop symbol has become a predetermined combination (the number of specific results) is a predetermined number of times or more (for example, n5 or more), SP reach production is executed, and SP reach production is performed. The cumulative image may be erased when executed.
In the example shown in FIG. 80, as the cumulative image, a point image showing a value based on the number of times (the number of specific results) that the assist stop symbol has become a predetermined combination is displayed, and the effect mode of the second effect (of the cumulative image The display mode) is “a first mode (a mode displaying a point image “100pt”. See FIG. 80(b))”→“a second mode (a mode displaying a point image “200pt”. FIG. 80(c). ))→“third aspect (an aspect in which a point image of “300pt” is displayed. See FIG. 80(d))”→“fourth aspect (an aspect in which a point image of “400pt” is displayed. FIG. 80(e) )See)”. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 80, the cumulative value switching display effect is executed as the second effect.

In this way, the effect control means (effect control device 300) causes a predetermined image (cumulative image) to appear on the display device (sub display device 41b) as the second effect, and the result of the first effect is the specific result. It is possible to execute the effect of switching the display mode of the predetermined image according to the fact that (the assist stop symbol has become the predetermined combination), and the third effect (SP reach effect etc.) is executed. The condition may be such that the display mode of the predetermined image is returned to the normal display mode (for example, the mode in which the point image is hidden or the mode in which the point image “0pt” is displayed).
Of course, the predetermined image is not limited to the point image, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the effect for switching the display mode of the predetermined image is not limited to the effect (effect for increasing the point value) shown in FIG. 80, and can be appropriately changed. For example, the predetermined image is a meter image,
As an effect of switching the display mode of a predetermined image, an effect of increasing the meter value may be performed.

When the assist stop design is directly applied to the decoration special map variation display game (decoration design), the player may misunderstand or misunderstand it, as shown in FIG. 80, the first effect, the second effect,
By executing the third effect and indirectly operating the assist stop pattern (via the medium such as an image or a character) on the decorative special figure variation display game, misidentification and misunderstanding are prevented and interest is improved. To do.

The third effect is not limited to that executed when the number of times the result of the first effect reaches a specific result is a predetermined number of times or more, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be an effect corresponding to the effect mode of the second effect.
Specifically, for example, the third effect is a reach effect. When the production mode (display mode of the accumulated image) of the second effect at the start of the special figure variation display game with the reach effect is the first aspect, as the third effect in the special figure variation display game. If the outlier reach effect or the normal reach effect is executed and in the second mode, the reach effect of normal reach or higher is executed as the third effect in the special figure variation display game, and in the third mode,
In the special figure variation display game, a reach effect of SP reach or higher is executed as a third effect,
In the case of the fourth aspect, a reach effect having a particularly high expectation among SP reach may be executed as the third effect in the special figure variation display game.

In addition, for example, the third effect is an on-hold change effect (effect that changes the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display), and the display mode (color) of the decoration special figure starting memory display is white<blue<yellow<green<purple. It is assumed that the degree of expectation is high in the order of <red <rainbow, and the normal display mode (normal color) of the decorative special figure starting memory display is not a single color but a mixed color or two or more colors. When the effect mode (display mode of the accumulated image) of the second effect at the hold change timing is the first effect, an effect of changing the color of the decorative special figure starting memory display to white is executed as the third effect. However, in the case of the second mode, an effect of changing the color of the decoration special figure starting memory display to a color of blue or more is executed as the third effect, and in the case of the third mode, the decoration as the third effect. An effect of changing the color of the special figure starting memory display to a color of green or more is executed, and in the case of the fourth mode, an effect of changing the color of the decorative special figure starting memory display to a color of red or more as the third effect. May be executed.

In addition, for example, the third effect is a pseudo continuous variation effect. Then, when the effect mode (display mode of the accumulated image) of the second effect at the start of the special figure variation display game accompanied by the pseudo variable effect is the first mode, the number of pseudo consecutive times is 1 as the third effect. When the effect is the second mode, the effect having the pseudo consecutive number of times is 2 as the third effect in the case of the second mode, and when the third mode is the pseudo consecutive number of times as the third effect. Is performed three times, and in the case of the fourth mode,
You may make it perform the effect|action which the pseudo continuous frequency|count is 4 times as a 3rd effect.

In addition, when the number of lit (emitted) character light emitting parts exceeds a predetermined number or when the point value (or meter value) exceeds a certain value, the alternative effect may be executed. Good.
In addition, when the number of character light emitting parts that are lit (light emitting) exceeds a predetermined number during execution of the special figure variable display game that results in a big hit, or the point value (or meter value) is a certain value or more. In such a case, an effect of notifying the number of big hit rounds (for example, an effect of displaying the number of big hit rounds in the sub display area 41b) may be performed.

<Modification C of game board>
Modification C of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82.
FIG. 81(a) is a diagram illustrating a main part of the game board 30 of the modified example C and is a diagram (front view) viewed from the front side. Further, FIG. 82(a) is a diagram illustrating a main part of the game board 30 of the present modification, and is a perspective view seen from the front side.
The game board 30 of the present modification basically has the same configuration as the game board 30 of the modification B, and the differences will be mainly described below. In the outzone unit 800 of the modified example B, game balls that have not won any of the plurality of winning areas provided in the game area 32 can flow into the outzone unit 900 of the modified example. A game ball that has won a prize can flow into the prize area (the start prize hole 36 in the case of this modification).

As shown in FIGS. 81(a) and 82(a), the out-zone unit 900 is the game board 3
The start winning port 36 is formed on the front side of 0 and the pseudo winning port 900 is formed on the rear side of the game board 30.
A winning opening forming member 910 that forms a, and a rotating body 920 arranged behind the game board 30,
The first guiding flow path 93 for guiding the gaming ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 (that is, the gaming ball that flows into the starting winning opening 36 and is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a) to the rotating body 920.
0a forming a first guide flow path member 930 and a second guide flow path 940a for guiding the game ball lifted up from below by the rotating rotor 920 to the pseudo winning opening 900a. And a guide channel member 940.
It should be noted that some of the members are omitted in FIGS. 81(a) and 82(a) in order to facilitate understanding of the first guide channel member 930, the rotating body 920, and the second guide channel member 940. doing. For example, in FIG. 81(a) and FIG. 82(a), the game board 30 is not shown. Further, in order to make the rotor 920 easy to understand, in FIG. 81(a), a portion of the stage portion 32S which overlaps the rotor 920 when viewed from the front is shown by a virtual line (two-dot chain line).

In order that the rotating body 920 arranged at the rear of the game board 30 can be seen from the front, the portion of the game board 30 that overlaps with the rotating body 920 when viewed from the front and the stage portion 32S that rotates when viewed from the front The portion overlapping with the body 920 has a light-transmitting property. That is, at least a part of the game board 30 and the stage portion 32S (specifically, a portion overlapping the rotating body 920 when viewed from the front) is transparent or translucent.

In the present modification, the stage part 32S has a game ball on the stage part 32S, that is, a game ball guided from the game area 32 outside the center case 40 to the stage part 32S by the warp flow path part 43. It is configured to drop only from the front end side of the stage portion 32S. Specifically, the stage part 32S is inclined downward, for example. Therefore, the game ball, the stage portion 3 to the start winning port 36 provided on the front side of the game board 30
Although it can directly flow in from 2S, it cannot directly flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a provided on the rear surface side of the game board 30 from above the stage section 32S. That is, the game ball on the stage 32S is
It cannot flow into the pseudo winning port 900a without passing through the starting winning port 36, the first induction channel 930a, the rotating body 920, and the second induction channel 940a.

FIG. 82B is a perspective view of the winning opening forming member 910 seen from the front side.
As shown in FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b), the winning opening forming member 910 is formed to be long in the front-rear direction, and the front end portion forms the starting winning opening 36 and the rear end portion forms the pseudo winning opening 900a. ing. As shown in FIG. 82(a), in the winning opening forming member 910, the front end portion (that is, the starting winning opening 36) projects forward from the front surface of the game board 30, and the rear end portion (that is, the pseudo winning opening 90).
0a) penetrates the game board 30 back and forth so as to project rearward from the rear surface of the game board 30.

That is, in this modified example, the starting winning opening 36 and the pseudo winning opening 900a are arranged in front and rear. Therefore, the game ball guided by the second guide flow path 940a actually flows into the simulated winning a prize opening 900a, but by arranging the starting winning a prize opening 36 and the simulated winning a prize opening 900a back and forth, for example, FIG. 81(a). As shown in, the game ball guided by the second guide flow path 940a can be made to appear as if it were winning in the starting winning opening 36. Further, since the game ball guided by the second guide flow path 940a is the game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36, the starting winning opening 36 and the pseudo winning opening 900a are arranged in front and behind to make the starting winning opening 36. It is possible to make it look as if the winning game balls have won the start winning port 36 again.
The member forming the starting winning opening 36 and the member forming the pseudo winning opening 900a do not have to be the same member (winning hole forming member 910). That is, the member forming the starting winning opening 36 and the member forming the pseudo winning opening 900a may be different members.

As shown in FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b), an opening 911 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the side surface or the bottom surface (the right side surface in the case of this modification) of the front end portion of the winning opening forming member 910. Has been.
The game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 passes through the opening 911 to start the winning opening 36.
From the inside to the outside and flows into the first guide flow passage 930a.
In this modified example, only the game balls that have won the start winning opening 36 flow into the first guide passage 930a and are guided to the rotating body 920 by the first guide passage 930a. Specifically, the first guiding flow path 93 of the game ball flowing down around the out zone unit 900.
Although not shown, for example, an obstacle member (for example, a protrusion-shaped or wall-shaped member formed of resin) or the like is provided around the first guide flow path member 930 in order to prevent the entry into 0a. A plurality of nails and the like are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 82(a), the width of the first guide flow passage 930a is set to a width in which the game balls flow down in a row from the upstream side (starting winning opening 36 side) to the downstream side (rotating body 920 side). Has been done.
The first guide flow passage 930a is inclined so as to descend from the upstream side to the downstream side. That is, a height difference (inclination in the case of this modification) is provided on the upper surface of the first guide flow passage member 930 such that the upstream side of the first guide flow passage 930a is arranged at a position higher than the downstream side. There is. As a result, the game ball can smoothly flow down the first guide flow passage 930a (that is, the upper surface of the first guide flow passage member 930), and thus the start winning port 36 and the ball clogging in the first guide flow passage 930a. Can be prevented.
The height difference provided on the upper surface of the first guide flow path member 930 may be a step or the like instead of the inclination.
Further, the first guide flow path member 930 may be arranged behind the game board 30. Also,
On the upper surface of the first guide flow path member 930 (that is, the first guide flow path 930a), a ball power suppression portion (unevenness, protrusion, etc.) for suppressing the power of the game ball, and the game ball to the hole of the rotating body 920. A ball guide portion (concavities and convexities, etc.) may be provided for guiding.

As shown in FIG. 82(a), the first guide flow passage 930a is a substantially L-shaped flow passage, and the bent portion is curved so that the game ball can flow down smoothly. The downstream portion of the first guide flow path 930a (
That is, the portion extending in the front-rear direction) is disposed in a through-hole 30b provided in the game board 30 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the downstream end of the first guide passage 930a is on the rear surface side of the game board 30. Has reached. The through hole 30b provided in the game board 30 is formed in a size that allows the game ball flowing down the first guide flow passage 930a to pass through. The game ball guided by the first guide flow passage 930a advances from the front surface side to the rear surface side of the game board 30 by passing through the through hole 30b, and the rotating body 920 arranged behind the game board 30. Flows into the hole.
Although FIG. 82(a) illustrates only the inlet (front end) of the through hole 30b, the outlet (rear end) of the through hole 30b is, for example, substantially the same as the downstream end of the first guide flow passage 930a. It is located on a plane (the plane is a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction).

81(b) is a view seen from the front side of the rotating body 920, and FIG. 81(c) is a rotating body 9
FIG. 10 is a view seen from the front side of a rotating body cover 950 attached to 20.
As shown in FIGS. 81(a) and 81(b), the rotating body 920 is a disk-shaped member, and is arranged in a state where its thickness direction substantially coincides with the front-rear direction. The rotating body 920 is attached to the rear surface side of the game board 30 by a rotating shaft 921 penetrating the center of the rotating body 920.
It is configured to rotate around 21 at a constant speed in a constant direction (in the case of the present modification, a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front side).

The rotating body 920 is provided with a game ball housing portion 920a capable of housing a game ball and a game ball discharging portion 920b capable of guiding the game ball to the ball discharging unit. Specifically, the rotating body 92
A plurality of (8 in this modification) holes penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided at 0 so as to be aligned in the circumferential direction of the rotating body 920. The hole is formed to have a size through which the game ball can pass, and of these holes, the game ball is discharged (specifically, the game ball passes from the front of the hole to the rear). The hole having the discharge restricting wall 922 on the rear end side forms the game ball accommodating part 920a, and the hole having no discharge restricting wall 922 is the game ball discharging part 920b.
Make up.

In the present modification, the number of game ball discharging units 920b included in the rotating body 920 is one, but the number of game ball discharging units 920b is not limited to one and may be plural.
In addition, in the present modification, a part of the plurality of holes of the rotating body 920 has a game ball housing portion 920a.
However, all of the plurality of holes of the rotating body 920 may be the game ball accommodating portion 920a. That is, the rotating body 920 does not have to include the game ball discharging section 920b.

A transparent rotating body cover 950 that covers the front surface of the rotating body 920 is attached to the rotating body 920. As shown in FIG. 81( c ), the rotor cover 950 is placed at a predetermined first position (the lowest position (ie, the 6 o'clock position) in this modification) of the holes of the rotor 920. The game ball is in a portion facing the hole portion that has reached and a portion that faces the hole portion that has reached the predetermined second position (in the case of this modification, the uppermost position (that is, the 12 o'clock position)). Passable opening 9
Have 51.

The rotator cover 950 is non-rotatably fixed. That is, even if the rotating body 920 rotates, the rotating body cover 950 does not rotate, and one of the two openings 951 provided in the rotating body cover 950 maintains the state of being arranged in the first position, The other of the two openings 951 provided in the rotating body cover 950 maintains the state of being arranged in the second position.
When the rotating cover 950 is transparent or semi-transparent, a pattern or the like may be provided on the front surface of the rotating body 920 for identifying the game ball discharging section 920b and the game ball storing section 920a.
Specifically, for example, a triangular pattern provided on the front surface of the rotating body 1930 shown in FIG. 92 is provided near either one of the game ball discharging section 920b and the game ball housing section 920a. Is also good. In this case, whether the game ball has flown into the game ball discharge section 920b or not.
Since it is easy to understand whether the game ball has flown into the hole 20a, it is possible for the game ball to determine whether or not the game ball wins the pseudo winning opening 900a when the game ball flows into the hole of the rotating body 92. Become.

The game ball flowing down the first guide flow path 930a passes through one of the two openings 951 (the lower opening 951 in the case of this modification) provided in the rotating body cover 950, and the rotating body 920.
Of the holes of the first hole (the lowermost position in the case of the present modification).
Then, the game ball that has flowed into the hole portion of the rotating body 920 has the hole portion as the game ball discharge portion 92.
If it is 0b, it passes through the hole and is discharged to the ball discharging unit.
In addition, the game ball that has flowed into the hole of the rotating body 920 has the hole in the game ball accommodating portion 920.
In the case of a, when the rotating body 920 rotates and the hole reaches the second position (in the case of this modification, the uppermost position), of the two openings 951 provided in the rotating body cover 950. The other of (
In the case of this modification, it passes through the upper opening 951) and flows into the second guide flow passage 940a. In this modified example, the game ball lifted by the rotating body 920 (that is, the game ball housing portion 92).
Only the game ball that has flowed into 0a) is configured to flow into the second guide flow path 940a.

It should be noted that the rotating body 920 is not limited to one that holds the game ball by the hole (the game ball housing portion 920a, the game ball discharge portion 920b), and may be one that holds the game ball by a magnet, for example. Specifically, for example, a magnet is built in the rotating body 920, and a game ball that comes into contact with a magnet arrangement location (where the magnet is arranged) on the front surface of the rotating body 920 is attracted (contacted) to the magnet arrangement location by the magnet. It may be configured such that the game sphere attracted to the magnet arrangement position is lifted from the bottom to the top by the rotating body 920 (that is, guided to the second guide passage 940a).

FIG. 82C is a perspective view of the second guide flow path member 940 as seen from the front surface side.
As shown in FIG. 82(c), the second guide flow path member 940 is a rectangular plate-shaped member, and has an upstream projection 941 protruding rearward at the upstream end (the right end in the case of this modification). And a downstream projection 942 that projects rearward is provided at the downstream end (the left end in this modification). The upstream projection 941 of the second guide flow path member 940 has the rotor cover 950.
Is inserted from the front into a hole 952 (see FIG. 81(c)) provided in the second guide flow path member 940, and the downstream projection 942 of the second guide flow path member 940 is provided behind the second guide flow path member 940. It is inserted from the front into a hole (not shown) provided in a predetermined member. In this way, the second guide flow passage member 940 is inserted in the predetermined hole by inserting the upstream projection portion 941 and the downstream projection portion 942 into a predetermined state (that is, upstream of the second guide flow passage 940a). The side is arranged at a position higher than the downstream side), and can be fixed to a predetermined position (that is, a position where the game ball lifted by the rotating body 920 can be guided to the pseudo winning opening 900a). ..
In addition, on the upper surface of the second guide flow path member 940 (that is, the second guide flow path 940a), a ball power suppressing portion (unevenness, protrusion, etc.) for suppressing the power of the game ball, or the game ball to the pseudo winning opening 900a. A ball guide portion (concavities and convexities, etc.) may be provided for guiding.

The game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 first passes through the opening 911 provided in the front end portion of the winning opening forming member 910 and flows into the first guiding flow path 930a.
The game ball that has flowed into the first guide flow passage 930a flows down through the first guide flow passage 930a, and the through hole 30b provided in the game board 30 and the two openings 951 provided in the rotating body cover 950.
One of the holes (the lower opening 951 in the case of the present modification) is passed to the first position (the lowest position in the case of the present modification) of the plurality of holes of the rotating body 920. It flows into the reaching hole.

When the hole reaching the first position is the game ball discharging section 920b, the game ball flowing into the hole is discharged to the ball discharging unit. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the game ball discharging section 920b from the front of the game ball discharging section 920b passes through the game ball discharging section 920b and is discharged to the ball discharging unit.
On the other hand, when the hole reaching the first position is the game ball housing 920a, the game ball that has flowed into the hole is lifted from the bottom by the rotating body 920. Then, when the hole reaches the second position (in the case of the present modification, the uppermost position), the game ball housed in the hole is one of the two openings 951 provided in the rotating body cover 950. Through the other (in the case of the present modification, the upper opening 951) and flows into the second guide flow passage 940a.

The game ball that has flowed into the second guide flow passage 940a flows down through the second guide flow passage 940a and flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a.
As shown in FIGS. 82(a) and (b), an opening 912 through which a game ball can pass is formed on the side surface or bottom surface (rear side surface in the case of this modification) of the rear end portion of the winning opening forming member 910. It is provided.
The game ball that has flowed into the pseudo winning opening 900a advances from the inside of the pseudo winning opening 900a to the outside by passing through the opening 912, and is discharged to the ball discharging unit. In this modification, only the game balls that have flowed into the second guide flow path 940a are configured to flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a. That is, only the game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 can flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a.

As described above, in this modified example, the game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 flows into the game ball discharging portion 920b of the rotating body 920 and is discharged to the ball discharging unit, or the rotating body 9
When it flows into the 20 game ball housing portion 920a, it flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a and is discharged to the ball discharging unit. That is, the game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 cannot return to the outside (game area 32) of the out zone unit 900.

The game ball that has flown into the pseudo winning opening 900a is detected by a pseudo winning opening switch (not shown). The detection signal of the pseudo winning opening switch is output to the effect control device 300, and when the pseudo winning opening switch detects a game ball, the effect control device 300 is configured to execute a predetermined effect.
Like the pseudo winning opening 870 of the modified example B, the pseudo winning opening 900a of the present modification is an assist starting opening, and when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a, the assist symbol effect (FIGS. 67 to 73).
Refer) is executed. In addition, triggered by the fact that the game ball has flown into the pseudo winning opening 900a, FIG.
It is also possible to execute the effect shown in 0.

The game balls that flow into the out-zone unit 900 are not limited to the game balls that have won the starting winning opening 36, but other winning areas (general winning opening 35, normal variation winning device 37, first special variation). It may be a game ball that has won the winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39).
In addition, the game balls that flow into the out-zone unit 900 are not limited to the game balls that have won one winning area, and may be the game balls that have won multiple winning areas. Specifically, for example, a flow path for guiding the game balls that have won the normal variation winning device 37 to the first guide flow path 930a may be provided. In this case, in the out zone unit 900, the starting winning opening 3
It is possible to play a specific game (in the case of this modified example, a game as to whether or not the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a) by using the game ball winning in 6 and the game ball winning in the normal variation winning device 37. it can.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, the winning area (in the case of the present modification, the starting winning opening 3
6) and an inflow area (out zone unit 9) into which the game balls won in the prize area can flow.
00), and a specific game (in the case of the present modification, a game ball whether or not the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a in the inflow region, using the game ball that has won the winning region). )
When it is determined that the specific game mechanism (in the case of this modification, the first guide flow passage 930a, the rotating body 920, the second guide flow passage 940a, and the pseudo winning opening 900a) that performs the specific game result reaches a predetermined result. In addition, the effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing a predetermined effect (in the case of this modification, an assist symbol effect) is provided.

Therefore, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced while maintaining the fairness and fairness of the game.
Specifically, since the specific game (game ball effect) can be played in the inflow area (out zone unit 900) such as the out area, the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, the specific game (game ball effect) is an effect using the game ball that has flowed into the inflow area (out zone unit 900), and is not an effect using the game ball that may win the winning area.
The fairness and fairness of the game can be maintained.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, the winning area (in the case of the present modification, the starting winning opening 36)
And an inflow area (outzone unit 900) into which the game balls won in the prize area flow
In the gaming machine provided with and, in the inflow area, a ball effect mechanism (in the case of the present modification, the first guide passage 930a, the rotating body 920, the second body) that performs an effect using the game balls that have won the prize area. The guide flow passage 940a and the pseudo winning opening 900a) are provided, and the ball production mechanism allows the game balls winning the winning area to flow into the specific area (pseudo winning opening 900a) and the gaming balls winning the winning area to the specific area. And a movable member (rotating body 920 in the case of the present modification) that guides.

Therefore, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced while maintaining the fairness and fairness of the game.
Specifically, in an inflow area (out zone unit 900) such as an out area, an effect (game ball effect) that uses a game ball that has won a prize area can be performed. In the case of this modification,
A specific area (pseudo winning opening 900a) into which game balls can flow is provided behind the winning area, and since the gaming balls that have won the winning area can be guided to the specific area, the games that have won in the winning area As an effect using a ball (game ball effect), it is possible to perform an effect in which a game ball that has already won in the winning area appears as if to win the winning area again, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the effect (game ball effect) performed in the inflow area (out zone unit 900) is an effect that uses the game ball that has won the winning area, and is not an effect that uses the game ball before winning the prize area. , The fairness and fairness of the game can be maintained.
That is, the gaming machine 10 of this modification is configured such that only the game balls that have won the winning area (the starting winning opening 36 in the case of this modification) can enter the inside of the inflow area (outzone unit 900). .. Specifically, for example, around the first guide flow path member 930 or the like, an obstacle member (made of resin is formed in order to prevent the game sphere flowing down around the out zone unit 900 from entering the inside. Members such as protrusions or wall-shaped members) and nails are provided.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, the movable member (rotating body 920) can be configured to lift the gaming ball by rotating.
By configuring in this way, the game ball inflow area (out zone unit 900)
Since it can stay inside for a long time, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect (game ball effect) using the game ball that has won the winning area.

Further, the effect using the game ball that has won the winning area (game ball effect) is an effect that uses the game ball that has flowed into the inflow area (out zone unit 900), and there is a possibility of winning in the winning area. Because it is not a production using balls, production using game balls that have won in the winning area (
As a game ball effect), an effect that cannot be performed using a game ball that has a possibility of winning in the winning area, for example, by moving the game ball against gravity by a movable member (rotating body 920) as in this modification. It is possible to perform an effect such as lifting.
Note that the movable member is not limited to the rotating body 920, and can be changed as appropriate. The movable member may be, for example, a ball storage device that can be converted into a first state in which game balls are stored and a second state in which game balls are not stored. A movable member that can guide the game ball to a specific area may be diverted.

<< replay production >>
The predetermined effect that can be executed when the result of the specific game is the predetermined result (that is, when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a) is not limited to the assist symbol effect, and can be appropriately changed. .. The predetermined effect may be, for example, a replay effect (specifically, a re-variation effect in the replay effect).
The replay effect is a temporary stop effect that temporarily stops the decorative special figure variable display game in a predetermined result mode (for example, a result mode of a deviation) in the middle of the special figure variable display game, and then a predetermined condition is satisfied ( In the case of this modified example, the effect is a re-variation effect in which the decorative special figure variation display game that is temporarily stopped is restarted when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a). When the replay effect can be executed, the effect control device 300 performs, for example, the main process (see FIG. 74 and the like).
In, the replay control process shown in FIG. 83 is executed.

For example, at the start of the special map variation display game, a replay effect approval/disapproval lottery for determining whether or not to perform a replay effect during the special map variation display game is performed. Perform replay production during the game.
Specifically, for example, when the content of the variable effect determined in step C521 in the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 77 and the like) is the content including the replay effect, it is determined that the replay effect availability lottery is won. Then, when the content of the variable effect determined in step C521 is the content including the replay effect, the display setting of the temporary stop effect in the replay effect is performed in step C523. As a result, the decorative special figure variable display game is started, and after a predetermined time, the decorative special figure variable display game is temporarily stopped in a predetermined result mode.

[Replay control processing]
FIG. 83 shows the replay control process in the main process. In this replay control process, first, it is determined whether or not the temporary stop effect in the replay effect is being executed (the decorative special figure variation display game is temporarily stopped) (step C421).
When it is determined that the temporary stop effect is not being executed (step C421; N), the replay control process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the temporary stop effect is being executed (step C421; Y), it is determined whether the pseudo winning opening switch detects a game ball (step C422).

When it is determined that the pseudo winning opening switch detects a game ball (step C422; Y), that is, when the gaming ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a, the display setting of the re-variation effect in the replay effect is performed (step S422). C423), and ends the replay control process. As a result, the decorative special variable display game that is temporarily stopped is restarted.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo winning opening switch does not detect the game ball (step C42)
2; N), that is, when the game ball does not flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a, it is determined whether or not the remaining time value of the decorative special figure variation display game that is temporarily stopped is less than a predetermined threshold value (step C).
424). Here, the remaining time value of the decorative special figure variable display game is the time value from the start of the decorative special figure variable display game to the present time, from the value of the predetermined variable time of the decorative special figure variable display game. It is the time value of the difference obtained by subtracting.

When it is determined that the remaining time value of the decorative special figure variation display game that is temporarily stopped is not less than the predetermined threshold value (step C424; N), the replay control process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining time value of the temporary decoration decoration variation display game during the temporary stop is less than the predetermined threshold value (step C424; Y), the display setting of the revariation effect in the replay effect is performed (step S424). C423), and ends the replay control process. As a result, the decorative special variable display game that is temporarily stopped is restarted.

The value of the variation time of the decorative special figure variation display game is predetermined, and the time of the temporary stop is also counted as the variation time. In the case where the game ball has flown into the pseudo winning port 900a, or when the game ball has not flowed into the pseudo winning port 900a by the end of the variation time of the temporary decoration decoration variation display game, the game ball is Cannot flow back to the pseudo winning opening 900a, so that the decorative special figure variation display game that is temporarily stopped cannot be restarted. Therefore, when the remaining time value of the decoration special figure variation display game during the temporary stop is below the predetermined threshold value (step C425; Y), the temporary stop is performed even if the game ball does not flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a. The decoration display variation display game inside will be restarted.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example is changed from the first mode (for example, a mode in which the decoration special map variable display game is temporarily stopped) to the second mode (for example, a mode in which the decoration special map variable display game is changed). The effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing a predetermined effect that can be switched (replay effect, for example) is provided, and the effect control means performs a predetermined effect when a game ball flows into a specific area (pseudo winning opening 900a). Can be configured to switch from the first aspect to the second aspect.
Specifically, an effect control unit (a replay effect) capable of executing a predetermined interruptable effect (for example, replay effect)
The production control device 300) is provided, and the production control means, in a state in which the predetermined production is interrupted (for example, in a state in which the decorative special figure variation display game is temporarily stopped), a game ball is placed in a specific area (pseudo winning opening 900a). When the inflow is made, the predetermined effect can be restarted.
With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a replay function using a game ball and enhance the interest of the game.

Further, when a predetermined effect that can be interrupted (for example, a replay effect) can be executed, the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a only when the decorative special figure variation display game is temporarily stopped, and the decorative special figure changes. The game ball may be configured not to flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a when the display game is not temporarily stopped.
The configuration can be realized, for example, by rotating the rotating body 920 during the temporary stop, and by waiting the rotating body 920 without rotating during the temporary stop. In this case, while the rotation of the rotating body 920 is stopped, there is a possibility that the first guide flow path 930a overflows with the game balls, so that the rotating body 920 is moved to the predetermined first position by the game ball discharging section 920b ( In the case of this modification, it is preferable to wait in the state of being in the lowermost position.
In addition, in the configuration, for example, the specific game mechanism in the out-zone unit 900 (in the case of this modification, the first guide passage 930a, the rotating body 920, the second guide passage 940a, and the pseudo winning opening 900a) is temporarily This can also be realized when the device is configured to be in the pseudo winning state (described later) when the game is stopped and in the pseudo winning impossible state (described below) when the game is not temporarily stopped.

In addition, the predetermined effect that can be executed when the result of the specific game is a predetermined result (that is, when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a) may be a revival effect.
Specifically, for example, when a battle effect is executed in the final effect of SP reach or the like, a revival effect in which a teammate character is revived is started with the game ball flowing into the pseudo winning opening 900a as an opportunity. Is also good. Further, similar to the replay effect described above, if the game ball does not flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a by a predetermined timing, the game ball will have the pseudo winning opening 90.
It is also possible to start the revival effect without flowing into 0a. In addition, a meter for notifying the number of game balls that have flowed into the pseudo winning port 900a (for example, the number of game balls that have flowed into the pseudo winning port 900a between a predetermined time and the present time) is displayed, and the level of the meter is displayed. It is also possible to start the revival production when the maximum is reached.
By performing such a revival effect, it is possible to increase the added value to the simulated winning a prize opening 900a, and thus it is possible to expect an increase in interest.

In addition, the predetermined effect that can be executed when the result of the specific game is a predetermined result (that is, when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a) is a hold display (decorative feature) displayed on the display device 41 or the like. The display mode of (figure starting memory display) is a display mode capable of suggesting a look-ahead result etc.
It may be a hold change effect of changing to a "final display mode").
Specifically, for example, in the case of a gaming machine that can display a hold display in a display mode (for example, a white mode that glows white) that notifies that a hold change effect may be executed, an intermediate mode The trigger for changing the display mode of the hold display displayed by, for example, to the final display mode may be the inflow of the game ball into the pseudo winning opening 900a.
Further, for example, in the case of a gaming machine that determines a final display mode when a start memory is generated and performs a changeable lottery to determine whether or not to change the display mode each time the hold display corresponding to the start memory is shifted (Alternatively, it may be a gaming machine that determines the final display mode and the change timing that changes the display mode when the start memory occurs.) You may give priority to the inflow of the game ball to the mouth 900a.
In addition, when it is decided to change the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the start memory to the final display mode a plurality of times when the start memory occurs, the inflow of the game ball into the pseudo winning opening 900a is triggered. In addition, the display mode of the hold display may be changed to the final display mode at once, or the display mode of the hold display may be changed every time the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a.
Further, similar to the replay effect described above, the game ball is the pseudo winning opening 900a by a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the variable display game based on the starting memory that is the target of the pending change effect).
When the game ball does not flow into the game, the game ball can be configured to perform the pending change effect even if the game ball does not enter the pseudo winning opening 900a.
By performing such a holding change effect, it becomes possible to pay attention to the inflow of the game ball into the pseudo winning opening 900a. In addition, since it is possible to increase the relevance between the inflow of game balls into the pseudo winning opening 900a and the effect, it is possible to expect an improvement in interest.

Further, it is also possible to display a specific image (cut-in image, character image, etc.) that notifies the expectation of the variable display game during execution or before the execution when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a. Is. In this case as well, improvement in interest can be expected.
Further, it is possible to perform an effect of stocking an execution right of a predetermined effect (for example, a notice effect for a predetermined variable display game), and a predetermined notification image for informing the number of stocks of the execution right can be displayed on the display device 41 or the like. In the case of, it is possible to display the predetermined notification image triggered by the inflow of the game ball into the pseudo winning opening 900a. In this case as well, improvement in interest can be expected.

《Game ball look-ahead production》
In addition, the result of the specific game (that is, whether or not the game ball has flown into the pseudo winning opening 900a)
It is also possible to inform (suggest) the look-ahead result. That is, it is also possible to execute a pre-reading notice effect (game ball pre-reading effect) using the game ball that has won the winning area.
In this case, for example, the specific game mechanism in the out-zone unit 900 (in the case of this modification, the first guide passage 930a, the rotating body 920, the second guide passage 940a, and the pseudo winning opening 900a).
) Is converted into a state in which the game balls flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo winning possible state") and a state in which the game balls do not flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo winning impossible state"). Configure as possible. Further, the effect control device 300 is configured to be capable of executing control for converting the specific game mechanism into a pseudo winning state and control for converting it into a pseudo winning impossible state.
Then, by converting the specific game mechanism into a pseudo winning possible state, there is a high possibility that the player will have a high degree of expectation (there is a high possibility that a reach will occur, there is a high possibility that a special result will occur, etc.). It is unlikely that the player will have a high degree of expectation by converting the specific game mechanism to the pseudo-non-win prize state (there is a low possibility of reaching, a possibility of a special result). Is low).

As described above, the game control device 100 has the start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 36 which form the first starting winning opening.
When a game ball is won in the ordinary variable prize device 37 that forms a starting winning hole, various random numbers (such as a big hit random number) are extracted, and a game based on the prize is awarded at a stage before the start of the special figure variable display game based on the prize. Preliminary determination of the game result is performed. The result of this game result pre-determination is the look-ahead result. That is, the prefetch result is a determination result of the result related information (whether or not it is a big hit and the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the starting memory, and the game is performed before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding starting memory. It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300.

Specifically, as the look-ahead result, for example, a look-ahead symbol system command (a look-ahead symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start-up memory of the pre-reading target) and a pre-reading variable system command (based on the start-up memory of the pre-reading target) A look-ahead variation pattern command including variation pattern information in the special figure variation display game) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300.
The prefetching symbol type command and the prefetching variable type command are commands including information necessary for executing the prefetching notice effect. The pre-reading notice production (also called pre-reading notice or pre-reading production) is whether or not a special figure variation display game corresponding to starting memory (holding) for which the special figure variation display game is not executed is a big hit when it is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance (or what kind of variation pattern) with a predetermined reliability, the decoration start memory display displayed on the display device 41 or the like is performed in a different mode from the normal one, or the display device 41 or the like is displayed. It is an effect such as performing an effect display. And read-ahead commands (read-ahead symbol commands and read-ahead variable commands)
Is a command that gives advance notice of a variation pattern and a stop pattern corresponding to the starting memory (starting memory of the prefetching target) that is the target of the prefetch notice effect, and is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the rendering control device 300 at the time of winning the start prize. .. Note that normal pattern-based commands and variable-based commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variable display.

Here, production control device 300, when receiving the pre-reading symbol system command, executes the pre-reading symbol system command processing which is shown in Figure 84. Further, when the prefetch variable system command is received, the prefetch variable system command processing shown in FIG. 85 is executed.

[Pre-reading pattern command processing]
In FIG. 84, the prefetch symbol type command processing (step C244) in the received command analysis processing (see FIG. 34) is shown. In this prefetching symbol type command processing, first, it is determined whether the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold (step C811).
If the latest hold information is special figure 1 hold (step C811; Y), that is, if the received prefetching symbol type command is related to special figure 1 hold, the command corresponds to the special figure 1 hold number. Special figure 1 it saves in the pre-reading design command area (step C812), sets the pre-reading variable command reception waiting flag (step C814), ends pre-reading design command processing.

On the other hand, if the latest hold information is not the special figure 1 hold (step C811; N), that is,
If the received prefetch symbol system command is related to special figure 2 hold, save the command in the special figure 2 preread symbol command area corresponding to the number of special figure 2 hold (step C813),
The read-ahead variable command reception waiting flag is set (step C814), and the read-ahead symbol system command processing ends.
The read-ahead variable command reception wait flag is set in step C814 because the read-ahead symbol command and the read-ahead variable command (read-ahead change pattern command) are set (pair).

[Prefetch variable system command processing]
FIG. 85 shows the prefetching variable system command process (step C246) in the received command analysis process (see FIG. 34). In this prefetching variable command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the prefetching variable command is waiting to be received (step C821). Here, if there is a read-ahead variable command reception wait flag set in the above-mentioned read-ahead symbol system command processing, it is determined that the reception is waiting.
If the prefetch variation command reception is not waiting (step C821; N), the prefetch variation command processing is ended.
On the other hand, when the prefetching variable command reception is waiting (step C821; Y), the prefetching variable command reception waiting flag is cleared (step C822).

After that, in the processes of steps C823 to C826, a process of converting the look-ahead change command (look-ahead change pattern command) received from the game control device 100 to be convenient for the process in the effect control device 300 is performed.
First, the process (step C823) of setting the look-ahead variable MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of symbols held in the latest hold information is performed, and the special-drawing-type information of the start-up memory corresponding to the read-ahead variable system command received this time and the relevant information A MODE conversion table for converting the MODE is set according to the current number of reserved special types.

Next, by referring to the set MODE conversion table, the sub prefetch change command MODE corresponding to the MODE of the prefetch change command is acquired (step C824). Then
The look-ahead variable ACT conversion table is set (step C825), and the sub-look-ahead read conversion command ACT corresponding to the ACT of the look-ahead variable command is acquired (step C826).

The MODE includes the information on the first half fluctuation, but the content and time of the first half fluctuation set based on this MODE changes depending on the number of holdings at the time of judgment, so the judgment at the time of preliminary judgment and the special figure fluctuation display game start The judgment result may be different depending on the time judgment. Therefore, in order to make it possible to easily and surely perform the prefetching notice effect processing without being affected by the number of holdings at the time of determination, the MODE is converted in the conversion mode according to the current number of holdings, and It is designed so that they can be handled commonly regardless of the number of holds. For example, if there is no reach and there is a short first half fluctuation time depending on the holding situation, or if there is no reach and there is a long first half fluctuation time regardless of the holding situation, It is converted into MODE classified according to the matters to be considered in the setting of the pre-reading notice effect so that the process of the pre-reading notice effect can be performed easily and surely.

Further, the ACT includes information on the latter half fluctuations such as the presence or absence of reach and the type of reach.
The content of the latter half fluctuation set based on this ACT does not change depending on the number of holdings at the time of determination. However, even in the normal reach, for example, the final stop symbol is set to be one stop before the reach symbol, one stop before the last stop, and a hit case.
There are various modes even for the same type of reach, and since the ACT corresponding to each of them is set, the range of values is wide. Therefore, by converting the ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system into the same ACTs, the number is reduced to reduce the processing load such as checking in the processing of the prefetching notice effect.

Next, it is determined whether both MODE and ACT after conversion are other than 0 (step C82).
7).
If both MODE and ACT after conversion are other than 0 (step C827; N), since the command value is abnormal, the prefetch variable system command processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if both MODE and ACT after conversion are other than 0 (step C827; Y), the converted command is saved in the prefetch variable command area corresponding to the latest pending information and pending number (step C828), A prefetch command consistency check process (step C829) for determining whether the combination of MODE and ACT (command combination) is normal is performed.

As a result of the prefetch command consistency check process (step C829), if the command combination is not normal (step C830; N), the prefetch variable system command process is ended.
On the other hand, when the command combination is normal (step C830; Y), the prefetch lottery process (step C831) for randomly selecting the execution of the prefetch notice effect is performed, and it is determined whether the game ball prefetch effect is generated (step C832). ).
When the game ball pre-reading effect is not generated (step C832; N), it is determined whether a pre-reading notice effect other than the game ball pre-reading effect is generated (step C834).
On the other hand, when a game ball pre-reading effect is generated (step C832; Y), that is, when the game ball pre-reading effect selected in the pre-reading lottery process (step C831) includes the game ball pre-reading effect, it corresponds to the game ball pre-reading effect. The action to be performed is set (step C833), and it is determined whether or not a pre-reading notice effect other than the game ball pre-reading effect is generated (step C834).

When no pre-reading notice effect other than the game sphere pre-reading effect is generated (step C834; N), the pre-reading variable system command processing is ended.
On the other hand, when a pre-reading notice effect other than the game ball pre-reading effect is generated (step C834; Y
) Indicates the occurrence of the prefetching notice effect (that is, the prefetching lottery process (step C831)).
It is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect selected in (the pre-reading notice effect other than the game ball pre-reading effect) is an effect to be started immediately (step C835). The effect to be started immediately is, for example, a notice of pending change for changing the display mode of the decorative start memory display displayed on the display device 41 or the like from the present time. In addition, the effect that does not start immediately is a look-ahead notice effect that is performed during execution of the special figure variation display game, and an effect or a variation that continuously generates a specific effect or reach state over a plurality of special figure variation display games. For example, an effect of giving a notice by a character appearing during display, a notice of a pending change for changing the display mode of the decoration start memory display at a timing later than the present time, and the like. As for the timing of starting the execution of the effect which is not started immediately, if the special figure variation display game is being executed, the special figure variation display game is ended and the execution of the next special figure variation display game is started. The timing to be performed is applicable.

If the effect does not start immediately (step C835; N), the prefetching variable system command processing is ended. In this case, the advance notice is set at the start of the special figure variation display game for executing the prefetch advance notice effect.
On the other hand, in the case of an effect to be started immediately (step C835; Y), a display corresponding to the selected pre-reading notice effect (pre-reading notice effect other than the game ball pre-reading effect) is set (step C836), and the pre-reading variation system is set. Command processing ends.

In the prefetch lottery process (step C831), for example, when the starting memory of the lottery target is the first starting memory (that is, when the latest holding information is the special figure 1 holding), the lottery for the game ball prereading effect is performed. It is executed together with the lottery for other pre-reading notice productions. In the lottery for the game ball prefetching effect, if the result of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory of the lottery target is a special result, the result of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory of the lottery target is not the special result. With a higher probability than in the case, it is determined to execute the game ball prefetching effect (that is, the game ball prefetching effect is selected). Alternatively, when the reach effect occurs during the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory of the lottery target, there is a higher probability than when the reach effect does not occur during the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory of the lottery object. It is decided to execute the game ball prefetching effect (that is, the game ball prefetching effect is selected). Hereinafter, the game ball that has generated the starting memory of the lottery target is referred to as a “target game ball”.

Then, when the pre-reading notice effect selected in the pre-reading lottery process includes the game ball pre-reading effect (step C832; Y), the operation corresponding to the game ball pre-reading effect is set (step C833). When the operation corresponding to the game ball prefetching effect is set, the effect control device 3
00 is, after a lapse of a predetermined first time, the specific game mechanism is converted from a pseudo-unwinable state to a pseudo-winable state, and after a lapse of a predetermined second time from the conversion, the specific game mechanism is in a pseudo-winable state. It is configured to convert from the pseudo prize winning state.

When the out-zone unit 900 shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 is changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 86, specifically, all the holes of the rotating body 920 are changed to the game ball accommodating portion 920a. When the discharge control wall 922 provided in each game ball housing portion 920a is changed to be openable and closable, the specific game mechanism can be converted into a pseudo winning award possible state and a pseudo prize award impossible state.
Specifically, this openable/closable discharge regulation wall 922 can regulate the discharge of the game ball (the game ball passes through from the front to the rear of the hole) in the closed state, but is in the open state. Then, the discharge of game balls cannot be regulated.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 86(a), the game ball housing portion 920a of the rotating body 920.
When the discharge restricting wall 922 provided in is closed, the game ball that has flowed into the game ball housing portion 920a is guided to the dummy winning port 900a by the rotating body 920 and the second guide flow passage 940a. It will be.
On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 86(b), when the discharge restriction wall 922 provided in the game ball housing portion 920a of the rotating body 920 is open, the game ball that has flowed into the game ball housing portion 920a. Will be discharged to the ball discharging unit after passing through the game ball accommodating portion 920a.
That is, by closing all the discharge restriction walls 922 (or the discharge restriction walls 922 provided in the game ball housing portion 920a into which the target game balls are to flow), the specific game mechanism is in the pseudo prize winning state, By opening all the discharge restriction walls 922 (or the discharge restriction walls 922 provided in the game ball housing 920a into which the target game balls are to flow),
The specific game mechanism is in a state in which it is impossible to win a prize. In this case, it is possible to switch between the pseudo winning possible state and the pseudo winning impossible state while the movement of the rotating body 920 remains constant. That is, since it is difficult for the player to determine at a glance whether the game is in the pseudo prize winning state or the pseudo prize winning state, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest even in the pseudo prize impossible state.

As described above, the effect control device 300 converts the specific game mechanism from the pseudo prize-winnable state to the pseudo prize-winnable state after the passage of the predetermined first time, and after the passage of the predetermined second time from the conversion, The specific game mechanism is configured to be converted from a pseudo prize winning state to a pseudo prize non-winning state. In the case of the configuration shown in FIG. 86, the first time is, for example, a time slightly shorter than the time required for the gaming ball to flow into the hole of the rotating body 920 after winning at the starting winning opening 36, It is preset based on the length of the guide flow passage 930a and the like. Further, the second time is, for example, the time required for the game ball to flow into the hole of the rotating body 920 until it flows into the second guide flow passage 940a, that is, the hole of the rotating body 920 is at the first position (main). In the case of the modified example, the time is slightly longer than the time required to move from the lowermost position) to the second position (in the case of the modified example, the uppermost position), which is based on the rotation speed of the rotating body 920 in advance. It is set.

Thereby, for example, the timing immediately before the target game ball flows into the hole of the rotating body 920 (
It is possible to convert the specific game mechanism from the pseudo-prize-winnable state to the pseudo-prize-winnable state at the timing (presumably just before the inflow), and the target game ball is the second guide flow path 9
It is possible to change the specific game mechanism from the pseudo-winable state to the pseudo-unwinable state at a timing immediately after the inflow to 40a (a timing estimated to be immediately after the inflow).

Alternatively, when the out-zone unit 900 shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 is changed to that shown in FIG. 87, specifically, the second guide flow path member 940 has a predetermined rotation shaft (for example, the upstream projection portion). 941) so as to be rotatable, and all of the holes of the rotating body 920 become the game ball housing portion 920a (the game ball housing portion 920a having the discharge restriction wall 922 that cannot be opened/closed). Even when the change is made, the specific game mechanism can be converted into a pseudo winning possible state and a pseudo winning impossible state.
Specifically, the rotatable second guide flow passage member 940 is rotated so that the upstream side high state in which the upstream side of the second guide flow passage 940a is arranged at a position higher than the downstream side, Second induction channel 9
The upstream side of 40a can be converted into an upstream low state in which the upstream side is arranged at a position lower than the downstream side.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 87(a), when the second guide flow path member 940 is in the high state on the upstream side, the game balls that have flowed into the second guide flow path 940a are on the downstream side (pseudo winning opening). 90
0a side), falls from the second guide flow path member 940, and flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a.
On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 87(b), when the second guide flow path member 940 is in the low state on the upstream side, the game ball that has flowed into the second guide flow path 940a is on the downstream side (pseudo winning opening). It will flow down to the side opposite to the (900a side), fall from the second guide flow path member 940, and flow into the out port 30a outside the out zone unit 900 (game area 32).
That is, when the second guide flow path member 940 is changed to the upstream side high state, the specific game mechanism is brought into a pseudo winning possible state, and when the second guide flow path member 940 is converted to the upstream side low state, the specific game mechanism is specified. The game mechanics are in a state in which pseudo prizes cannot be won.

As described above, the effect control device 300 converts the specific game mechanism from the pseudo prize-winnable state to the pseudo prize-winnable state after the passage of the predetermined first time, and after the passage of the predetermined second time from the conversion, The specific game mechanism is configured to be converted from a pseudo prize winning state to a pseudo prize non-winning state. In the case of the configuration shown in FIG. 87, the first time is, for example, a time that is slightly shorter than the time required for the game ball to flow into the second guide flow path 940a after the game ball has won the starting winning opening 36, It is set in advance based on the length of the guide passage 930a, the rotation speed of the rotating body 920, and the like. Further, the second time is, for example, a time slightly longer than the time required for the game ball to flow into the pseudo winning opening 900a after flowing into the second guiding flow path 940a, and the second guiding flow path 94.
It is preset based on the length of 0a.

As a result, for example, at a timing immediately before the target game ball flows into the second guide flow path 940a (a timing that is estimated to be immediately before flowing), the specific game mechanism is converted from the pseudo prize-winnable state to the pseudo prize-winnable state. It becomes possible and the target game ball is a pseudo winning a prize hole 9
It is possible to convert the specific game mechanism from the pseudo prize winning state to the pseudo prize non-winning state at a timing immediately after the inflow to 00a (a timing estimated to be immediately after the inflow).

When the out-zone unit 900 shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 is modified as shown in FIG. 88, specifically, the tributary flow passage 930b (separated from the first guidance flow passage 930a) is provided in the first guidance flow passage 930a. The exit flow path) is provided and the opening/closing door 931 is provided at the branch point to the tributary flow path 930b, and all the holes of the rotating body 920 are provided in the game ball accommodating part 920a.
Even when the game ball storage section 920a having the discharge restriction wall 922 that cannot be opened/closed is changed, the specific game mechanism can be converted into a pseudo winning award possible state and a pseudo prize award impossible state.
Specifically, the opening/closing door 931 is pivoted to open the inlet of the downstream portion of the first guide passage 930a and close the inlet of the tributary passage 930b, and the first guide passage 930b. 930
It can be converted into a mainstream closed state in which the inlet of the downstream portion of a is closed and the inlet of the tributary channel 930b is opened.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 88(a), when the opening/closing door 931 is in the mainstream open state, the game sphere flowing down the first guide passage 930a is located at the downstream portion of the first guide passage 930a. It enters, flows into the hole (game ball housing 920a) of the rotating body 920, and is guided to the pseudo winning opening 900a by the rotating body 920 and the second guide flow passage 940a.
On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 88(b), when the opening/closing door 931 is in the mainstream closed state, the game sphere flowing down the first guide passage 930a enters the tributary passage 930b, and the first guide It will fall from the flow path member 930 and will flow into the out port 30a outside the game zone 32 of the out zone unit 900.
That is, when the opening/closing door 931 is converted to the main stream open state, the specific game mechanism is set to the pseudo prize winning state, and when the opening/closing door 931 is converted to the main stream closed state, the specific game mechanism is set to the pseudo prize winning state. ..

As described above, the effect control device 300 converts the specific game mechanism from the pseudo prize-winnable state to the pseudo prize-winnable state after the passage of the predetermined first time, and after the passage of the predetermined second time from the conversion, The specific game mechanism is configured to be converted from a pseudo prize winning state to a pseudo prize non-winning state. In the case of the configuration shown in FIG. 88, the first time and the second time are preset based on, for example, the length of the first guide flow passage 930a and the position of the tributary flow passage 930b.
Specifically, the first time is, for example, the timing immediately before the target game ball arrives at the branch point to the tributary channel 930b (timing estimated to be just before arrival), and the specific game mechanism is in the pseudo prize-winning state. It is set to the time when it is possible to convert from the pseudo winning award possible state.
In addition, for the second time, for example, the target game ball is the entrance of the downstream portion of the first guiding flow path 930a (
That is, at a timing immediately after passing through the entrance (front end) of the through-hole 30b provided in the game board 30 (timing that is assumed to be immediately after passing), the specific game mechanism is changed from the pseudo-winnable state to the pseudo-winnable state. The time is set so that it can be converted to.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example has a winning area (in the case of this modified example, the winning opening 36) and an inflow area (out zone unit 900) into which the gaming balls won in the winning area flow. In the provided gaming machine, in the inflow area, a specific game that uses a game ball that has won the winning area (in the case of the present modification, a game whether or not the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 900a) Mechanism (in the case of this modification, the first guide flow passage 930a, the rotating body 920, the second guide flow passage 9)
40a and the pseudo winning opening 900a), and a notification unit (production control device 300) for notifying predetermined information (prefetch result in the case of this modification) based on the result of the specific game.

Therefore, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced while maintaining the fairness and fairness of the game.
Specifically, a specific game (game ball effect) can be played in an inflow area (out zone unit 900) such as an out area, and predetermined information can be notified according to the result of the specific game, so that the game is played. The interest of can be increased.
Further, the specific game (game ball effect) is an effect using the game ball that has flown into the inflow area (out zone unit 900), and is not an effect using the game ball that may win the winning area. The fairness and fairness of the game can be maintained.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example, a winning storage means (production control device 300) for storing a winning memory based on a winning of a game ball into a winning area (in the modified example, a starting winning opening 36), and a winning. Based on the memory, a game execution means (production control device 300) for executing a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) based on a plurality of identification information, and a winning memory, a variable display game based on the winning memory is executed. And a notification unit (production control device 300) configured to notify the determination result (prefetch result) of the preliminary determination device based on the result of the specific game. It is possible.

With such a configuration, the look-ahead result can be notified based on the result of the specific game, so that the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.
The predetermined information to be notified according to the result of the specific game is not limited to the prefetch result, that is, the game result of the variation display game before execution (the result-related information of the undigested variation),
It can be changed as appropriate, and may be, for example, the game result of the variation display game being executed (result-related information of variation during digestion).

<Game ball storage device>
Further, the out zone unit 900 may include a game ball storage device 960.
89(a) is a perspective view seen from the front side of the out-zone unit 900 including the game ball storage device 960, and FIG. 89(b) is a perspective view seen from the front side of the game ball storage device 960. is there.
As shown in FIGS. 89(a) and (b), the game ball storage device 960 includes, for example, a case member 961 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and an opening/closing member 962 for opening/closing an outlet 961b provided in the case member 961. , And an opening/closing drive mechanism section (not shown) for driving the opening/closing member 962.
The front wall of the case member 961 is provided with an inflow port 961a having a size through which a game ball penetrating in the front-rear direction can pass. Further, the right side wall of the case member 961 is provided with an outlet 961b having a size through which a game ball penetrating in the left-right direction can pass. The inlet 961
The arrangement position of “a” and the arrangement position of the outlet 961b can be appropriately changed. Specifically, the outlet 9
61b may be provided, for example, on the bottom wall of the case member 961.

As shown in FIG. 89(a), the inflow port 961a of the case member 961 is formed in the winning opening forming member 9
It is connected to the rear end of 10. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the pseudo winning opening 900a passes through the opening 912 of the winning opening forming member 910, and thus the inlet 961a of the case member 961.
Then, it enters the inside of the case member 961 and is stored inside the case member 961.
The case member 961 has optical transparency so that the game balls stored inside the case member 961 can be visually recognized from the front. That is, the case member 961 is a transparent or translucent member.

The opening/closing member 962 is, for example, as shown in FIG. 89A, the outlet 96 of the case member 961.
1b in a closed state and, for example, as shown in FIG. 89(b), the outlet 96 of the case member 961.
1b can be converted into an open state. When the opening/closing member 962 is in the open state, the game balls stored inside the case member 961 pass through the outlet 961b and are discharged to the ball discharging unit.
The production control device 300 converts the open/close member 962 from the closed state to the open state when a predetermined opening timing is reached, and when the predetermined closing timing is reached, for example.
Is configured to convert the open state to the closed state.

Here, the opening timing for converting the opening/closing member 962 to the open state can be appropriately selected, and may be, for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the closing timing, or the case member 961.
It may be when the number of game balls stored inside the game exceeds a predetermined threshold value, or when the player operates the operation means (for example, the effect button 25) in a predetermined operation mode. Good and
It may be at the start (or end) of the predetermined effect, or at the start (or end) of the variable display game. The number of game balls stored in the case member 961 can be determined, for example, by counting the number of times the pseudo winning opening switch detects the game balls.
The closing timing for converting the opening/closing member 962 to the closed state can be selected as appropriate.
For example, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the opening timing. The predetermined time is, for example, a time slightly longer than the time required to discharge all the game balls in the case member 961 when the inside of the case member 961 is full of game balls, and the size of the case member 961. It is set in advance based on the shape and shape.

In this way, the amount of game balls that have won the start winning port 36 by storing the game balls that have flowed into the pseudo winning port 900a inside the case member 961 by providing the game ball storage device 960 in the out zone unit 900. It is possible to make the player feel that.
It should be noted that, from the viewpoint of storing all the game balls that have won the start winning hole 36 inside the case member 961, it is preferable that all the holes of the rotating body 920 be the game ball housing portion 920a.

《Starting prize unit》
Instead of the out zone unit 900, a start winning unit 360 may be provided. That is, in the game board 30 of the present modified example, the starting winning unit 360 including the starting winning port 36 (first starting winning port, starting winning area) and the pseudo winning port 360a is arranged above the out port 30a. It may be.

FIG. 90 is a view for explaining a main part of the game board 30 of the gaming machine 10 including the starting winning unit 360, and is a view (front view) seen from the front side.
As shown in FIG. 90, the starting winning unit 360 has, for example, a substantially plate-shaped base member 361.
A passage opening forming member 362 attached to the upper part of the base member 361;
1 and a rotating body 363 attached to a substantially central portion thereof.
On the left side and the right side of the rotating body 363 in the base member 361, the pseudo winning opening 360a is provided. An outlet 364 is provided above the rotating body 363 of the base member 361 and below the passage opening forming member 362.

The passage port forming member 362 has a passage port 362a that opens toward the upper portion (stage portion 32S).
Is formed. The game ball that has flowed into the passage port 362a passes, for example, a back surface flow path (not shown) provided on the rear surface side of the base member 361, and then flows out of the outlet port 364 provided in the base member 361 to the base member 361. It flows out to the front side (that is, inside the starting winning unit 360).
The passage opening 362a has a shape that makes it look like a normal starting opening. As a result, the game ball that has entered the inside of the starting winning unit 360 can actually win the starting winning port 36, but by making the passage port 362a look like a normal starting port, the starting port (for example, The game balls that have won the starting winning opening 36) can be made to appear as if they entered the inside of the starting winning unit 360.

A rib-shaped left extending wall 365 and a right extending wall 366 are provided on the front surface side of the base member 361 and extend forward.
The left extending wall 365 forms a guide flow path for guiding the game ball flowing out from the outlet 364 to the left pseudo winning opening 360a.
In addition, the right extending wall 366, the game ball that has flowed out from the outlet 364, the pseudo winning opening 36 on the right side
A guiding flow path for guiding to 0a is formed.

Further, the left extending wall 365 and the right extending wall 366 also have a function of preventing the game ball flowing down around the starting winning unit 360 from entering the inside. Specifically, the starting winning unit 36
The inside of 0 is surrounded by the passage opening forming member 362, the rotating body 363, the left extending wall 365, and the right extending wall 366, whereby the game balls other than the game balls flowing into the passage opening 362a,
This prevents entry into the start winning unit 360. That is, the passage port 362
Only the game balls that have flowed into a can enter the inside of the starting winning unit 360.
It should be noted that, of the front surface of the base member 361, at least the passage opening forming member 362 and the rotating body 36 are provided.
It is preferable that the portion surrounded by 3, the left extending wall 365, and the right extending wall 366 be decorated.

The rotating body 363 has, for example, a shape in which a disc member is provided with a recessed portion in which a part of the outer peripheral surface of the disc member is recessed toward the center, and the start winning opening 36 is formed in the recessed portion. There is. The rotating body 363 is configured to rotate right and left at a constant speed. The rotating body 363 may be configured to rotate at a constant speed in a certain direction (for example, a clockwise direction when viewed from the front side).
By rotating the rotating body 363 to the left and right, it is possible to convert the gaming ball flowing out from the outlet 364 into a winning possible state in which the starting winning port 36 can be won and a difficult winning state (or impossible). Is.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 91(a), the state where the starting winning opening 36 faces the outlet 364 is the winning possible state.
On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 91(b), the starting winning opening 36 faces the left pseudo winning opening 360a, or as shown in FIG. 91(c), the starting winning opening 36 has the right winning opening. The state facing 360a is in a difficult winning state. When the game ball that has flowed out of the outlet 364 cannot flow into the starting winning port 36, such as when the rotating body 363 is in a winning difficulty state, the game ball is on the left side of the pseudo winning port 360a or on the right side of the winning port. It will flow into 360a.

The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 (that is, the game ball that flows into the start winning opening 36 and is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a) is discharged to the ball discharging unit.
In addition, the game ball that has flowed into the pseudo winning opening 360a is also discharged to the ball discharging unit. The game ball that has flown into the pseudo winning opening 360a is detected by a pseudo winning opening switch (not shown). The detection signal of the pseudo winning opening switch is output to the effect control device 300, and when the pseudo winning opening switch detects a game ball, the effect control device 300 is configured to execute a predetermined effect.

In this way, since the starting winning unit 360 can distribute the game balls that have flowed into the passage port 362a to the starting winning port 36 and the pseudo winning port 360a inside, the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 360a (that is, when the starting winning opening 36 is not won), a predetermined effect is executed, so that the gaming ball 3 starts.
It is possible to reduce the player's disappointment and loss feeling when not winning the 6th prize.
The inside of the start winning unit 360 is visible from the front.

Further, the effect control device 300, when the game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 360a (that is, when the detection signal of the pseudo winning opening switch is output to the effect controlling device 300), a predetermined effect (pseudo winning opening). You may make it store the effect memory which is the execution right of the effect executed when the game ball flows into 360a), and display the number of undigested effect memories. It is preferable that the number of undigested effect memories is displayed so as to be distinguishable from the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the undigested starting memories.

<Modification of out-zone unit>
The start winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting winning area) is provided above the outlet 30a.
The outzone unit including the pseudo winning opening is not limited to the outzone unit 900 shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, and can be changed as appropriate, and may be the outzone unit 1900 shown in FIG. 92, for example.

As shown in FIG. 92, the out-zone unit 1900 is attached to, for example, a substantially plate-shaped base member 1910, a distribution member 1920 attached to an upper portion of the base member 1910, and an approximately central portion of the base member 1910. It comprises a rotating body 1930 and a ball rolling member 1940 attached to the right part of the base member 1910.
The start winning port 36 is provided above the distribution member 1920 of the base member 1910, and the pseudo winning port 1900a is provided below the ball rolling member 1940 of the base member 1910. Further, an upper outlet 1911 is provided behind the sorting member 1920 in the base member 1910, and a lower outlet 1912 is provided below the rotating body 1930 in the base member 1910. Further, above the distribution member 1920 of the base member 361 and below the start winning port 36, the outlet 19 is provided.
13 are provided.

The game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 passes, for example, through a rear surface flow path (not shown) provided on the rear surface side of the base member 1910, and from the outlet 1913 provided in the base member 1910 to the base member 1910. To the front side (that is, inside the out-zone unit 1900).

On the front surface side of the base member 1910, a rib-shaped left outer extension wall 1951, a left inner extension wall 1952, a right outer extension wall 1953, a right inner extension wall 1954, and an intrusion prevention wall 19 that extend forward.
55 is provided.
The left outer extending wall 1951 and the left inner extending wall 1952 form a guide flow path for guiding the game balls flowing out from the outlet 1913 and distributed to the left side by the distribution member 1920 to the lower outlet 1912. ing.
Further, the right outer extending wall 1953 and the right inner extending wall 1954 have a guide flow path for guiding the game balls flowing out from the outlet 1913 and distributed to the right by the distribution member 1920 to the ball rolling member 1940. Has formed.

Further, the entry prevention wall 1955, together with the left outer extension wall 1951 and the right outer extension wall 1953, prevents entry of the game ball flowing down around the out zone unit 1900 into the inside. Specifically, the inside of the out zone unit 1900 is surrounded by the left outer extending wall 1951, the right outer extending wall 1953, and the entry prevention wall 1955, whereby the game ball winning the starting winning opening 36. Other game balls are prevented from entering the inside of the out zone unit 1900. That is, only the game balls that have won the start winning opening 36 can enter the out zone unit 1900.

The distribution member 1920 is, for example, a substantially V-shaped member having a recess 1921, and the recess 1921 can receive a game ball. The distribution member 1920 includes the rotating shaft 1
It is configured to rotate right and left around the 922 at a constant speed.
The distribution member 1920 rotates rightward and leftward so as to win the start winning opening 36 and the outlet 1913.
The rear distribution state in which the game balls that have flowed out of the game are received by the concave portion 1921 and are distributed to the rear side (the upper side outlet 1911) and the left shake that distributes the game balls that have won the start winning opening 36 and flowed out of the outlet 1913 to the left. It is possible to convert into a minute state and a right distribution state in which the game balls that enter the start winning opening 36 and flow out from the outlet 1913 are distributed to the right.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 93(a), the concave portion 1921 is located above (the starting winning opening 36).
) Is the rear-sorting state. When the distribution member 1920 is in the rear distribution state,
The game ball that entered the starting winning opening 36 and flows out from the outlet 1913 is received by the concave portion 1921 of the distributing member 1920 and is formed on the upper side outlet 191 formed behind the distributing member 1920.
1 and is discharged to the ball discharging unit.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 93(b), the state in which the recessed portion 1921 faces the right is the left distribution state. When the distribution member 1920 is in the left distribution state, the game balls that enter the start winning opening 36 and flow out from the outlet 1913 are the left side surface of the distribution member 1920 and the left outer extending wall 1951.
And the left inner extending wall 1952 guides the user to the lower outlet 1912. The game ball that has flown into the lower outlet 1912 is discharged to the ball discharging unit.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 93(c), the state in which the recessed portion 1921 faces the left is the right distribution state. When the distribution member 1920 is in the right distribution state, the game balls that enter the starting winning opening 36 and flow out from the outlet 1913 are the right side surface of the distribution member 1920 and the right outer extending wall 1953.
And the right inner extending wall 1954 guides the ball to the ball rolling member 1940. Ball rolling member 19
The game ball guided to 40 flows into the pseudo winning opening 1900a via the ball rolling member 1940 and is discharged to the ball discharging unit.

The rotating body 1930 is a disk-shaped member, and is arranged with its thickness direction substantially coinciding with the front-back direction of the gaming machine 10. The rotator 1930 rotates at a constant speed in a constant direction (clockwise as viewed from the front side in this example).
A magnet is built in the rotating body 1930. This magnet attracts the game ball, which comes into contact with the magnet placement location (location where the magnet is placed) on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 1930, to the magnet placement location (
It is for holding in contact state). When the game sphere comes into contact with the magnet disposition part of the rotating body 1930, it is attracted to the magnet disposition part and is lifted up from below by the rotating rotating body 1930 and guided to the ball rolling member 1940.

Therefore, when the game ball guided to the lower side outlet 1912 is attracted to the magnet arrangement portion of the rotating body 1930 before flowing into the lower side outlet 1912, the lower side outlet 1912
Is guided to the ball rolling member 1940 without flowing into.
On the other hand, the game ball guided to the lower outlet 1912 flows into the lower outlet 1912 when it is not attracted to the magnet arrangement portion of the rotating body 1930.
Note that, in the examples shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, there is only one magnet arranging portion of the rotating body 1930 (specifically, a portion indicated by a triangular pattern provided on the front surface of the rotating body 1930). There may be a plurality of locations.

The ball rolling member 1940 is a circular dish-shaped member and is a so-called clune. The upper surface of the ball rolling member 1940 is an inclined surface that descends toward the center. A communication hole 1941 is formed so as to flow down to 1900a. The game ball that has flowed into the ball rolling member 1940 gradually flows down to the center while orbiting, and the pseudo winning opening 19 from the communication hole 1941.
It is designed to flow down to 00a.

The game ball that has flown into the pseudo winning opening 1900a is detected by a pseudo winning opening switch (not shown). The detection signal of the pseudo winning opening switch is output to the effect control device 300, and when the pseudo winning opening switch detects a game ball, the effect control device 300 is configured to execute a predetermined effect. As the predetermined effect, for example, an effect in which a hot character or a group of characters appears is executed.

Whether the effect control device 300 performs the distribution effect of rotating the distribution member 1920, for example, when the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36, the starting memory stored based on the winning is selected as the lottery target. A lottery is performed to determine whether or not the distribution effect can be determined. This sort effect is a type of pre-reading notice effect, and in the sort effect approval/disapproval lottery, for example, when the result of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory of the lottery target is a special result, the start of the lottery target Execution of the distribution effect is determined with a higher probability than when the result of the special figure variation display game based on the memory is not the special result. That is, it can be said that the distribution effect is an effect with high expectation (big hit expectation).
As the distribution effects, left distribution weak effects, left distribution strong effects, and right distribution effects are set. In addition,
For example, the expected value is set to increase in the order of left distribution weak effect <right distribution effect <left distribution strong effect.

The distribution member 1920 rotates, for example, only in the distribution effect, and otherwise maintains the initial state (post-distribution state). Therefore, when it is determined not to execute the distribution effect in the distribution effect possibility lottery, the game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 and flows out from the outlet 1913 is received by the concave portion 1921 of the distribution member 1920. And flows into the upper outlet 1911.
On the other hand, when execution of the right distribution effect is determined in the distribution effect availability lottery, the effect control device 300 rotates the distribution member 1920 to move from the initial state (rear allocation state) to the right distribution state. Convert to. As a result, the game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 and flown out of the outlet 1913 is guided to the ball rolling member 1940 and flows into the pseudo winning opening 1900a.

In addition, when execution of the left distribution strong effect is determined in the distribution effect applicability lottery, the effect control device 300 rotates the allocation member 1920 to perform left allocation from the initial state (rear allocation state). Convert to state. As a result, the game balls that enter the starting winning opening 36 and flow out from the outlet 1913,
It is guided to the lower outlet 1912. The rotator 1930 rotates, for example, only when the left-side strong effect is produced, and does not rotate at other times. Therefore, when the game ball guided to the lower side outlet 1912 in the left distribution strong production is attracted to the magnet arrangement portion of the rotating body 1930 that rotates before flowing into the lower side outlet 1912, the rotation concerned. It is guided to the ball rolling member 1940 by the body 1930 and flows into the pseudo winning opening 1900a. On the other hand, if the magnet is not attracted to the magnet arrangement portion of the rotating body 1930 that rotates before flowing into the lower outlet 1912, it flows into the lower outlet 1912. In this way, in the left distribution strong effect, it is possible to perform a loser revival effect in which a game ball that may have flowed into the lower outlet 1912 flows into the pseudo winning opening 1900a, and the game can be reproduced. The interest is improved.

In addition, when execution of the left distribution weak effect is determined in the distribution effect availability lottery, the effect control device 300 rotates the distribution member 1920 to distribute the left distribution from the initial state (rear distribution state). Convert to state. As a result, the game balls that enter the starting winning opening 36 and flow out from the outlet 1913,
It is guided to the lower outlet 1912. The rotating body 1930 faces a state in which the game ball guided to the lower outlet 1912 cannot be attracted to the magnet placement location while the rotation is stopped (for example, the magnet placement location is the upper side (the side opposite to the lower outlet 1912)). Maintained). Therefore, the game ball guided to the lower outlet 1912 in the left distribution weakening effect is the rotating body 1930.
It does not adsorb to the magnet arrangement position of the above and flows into the lower outlet 1912.

Thus, according to the gaming machine 10 including the out zone unit 1900, the inflow area (
In the out-zone unit 1900), a specific game (for example, a game as to whether or not the game ball flows into the pseudo winning port 1900a) is performed by using the game ball that has won the winning area (for example, the starting winning opening 36) Game mechanism (for example, the left outer extending wall 1951 and the left inner extending wall 195
2 and the guide flow path formed by the right outer extending wall 1953 and the right inner extending wall 1954, the distribution member 1920, the rotating body 1930, the ball rolling member 1940, and the pseudo winning opening 1900a). And an effect control unit (effect control device 300) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, an effect in which a hot character or a group of characters appears) when it is determined that the result of the specific game has reached a predetermined result. Equipped with.

Therefore, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced while maintaining the fairness and fairness of the game.
Specifically, since the specific game (game ball effect) can be played in the inflow area (out zone unit 1900) such as the out area, the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, the specific game (game ball effect) is an effect that uses the game ball that has flowed into the inflow area (out zone unit 1900), and is not an effect that uses the game ball that may win the winning area. The fairness and fairness of the game can be maintained.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 including the out-zone unit 1900, notification means (production control device 300) for notifying predetermined information (for example, prefetch result) according to the result of the specific game.
Can be configured.
Here, the result of the specific game is, for example, "a game ball has flown into the upper outlet 1911 (that is, the distribution effect has not been executed)" or "a game ball has been distributed to the left side and has a lower outside". It flows into the mouth 1912 (that is, the left distribution weakness effect is executed),""The game ball is distributed to the left side and flows into the pseudo winning opening 1900a (that is, the left distribution strong effect is executed)" , "The game balls are distributed to the right side and flowed into the pseudo winning opening 1900a (that is, the right distribution effect is executed)".

Therefore, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced while maintaining the fairness and fairness of the game.
Specifically, a specific game (game ball effect) can be played in an inflow area (out zone unit 1900) such as an out area, and predetermined information can be notified according to the result of the specific game. The interest of can be raised.
Further, the specific game (game ball effect) is an effect that uses the game ball that has flowed into the inflow area (out zone unit 1900), and is not an effect that uses the game ball that may win the winning area. The fairness and fairness of the game can be maintained.

<Variation example of sorting production>
Here, a modified example of the distribution effect of rotating the distribution member 1920 will be described. Specifically, an example of a case in which the probability setting value and the big hit history currently set are suggested by the effect mode of the distribution effect will be shown.
As described above, as the distribution effects, left distribution weak effects (left distribution weak mode distribution effects), left distribution strong effects (left distribution strong mode distribution effects), right distribution effects (right). A distribution effect of a distribution mode) is set. That is, the production modes of the distribution production include a left distribution weak mode, a left distribution strong mode, and a right distribution mode. Then, the expected value (big hit expectation degree, etc.) is, for example, higher in the order of left swing weak effect <right swing effect <left swing strong effect. That is, in the distribution effect described above, an expected value (a big hit expectation degree or the like) can be suggested by the effect mode of the distribution effect.

The information that can be suggested by the effect mode of the distribution effect is not limited to the expected value and can be changed as appropriate, and may be, for example, the currently set probability setting value.
Specifically, the effect control device 300, for example, when the game ball is won in the starting winning opening 36, the starting memory stored based on the winning is selected as a lottery target, and the sorting effect of rotating the sorting member 1920. A sorting effect applicability lottery for determining whether or not to perform is performed.
The distribution member 1920 rotates, for example, only in the distribution effect, and otherwise maintains the initial state (post-distribution state). Therefore, in the case of not winning the distribution effect applicability lottery (when non-execution of the distribution effect is determined in the distribution effect applicability lottery), the game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 and flown out from the outlet 1913. Is received by the concave portion 1921 of the distribution member 1920 and flows into the upper outlet 1911.

On the other hand, when the distribution effect availability lottery is won (when the execution of the distribution effect is determined in the distribution effect availability lottery), the effect control device 300 assigns based on the currently set probability setting value. The effect mode of the division effect is determined, and the distribution effect is executed in the determined effect mode.
For example, as shown in FIG. 94(a), the currently set probability setting value is "3" or "4".
In the case of, the distribution effect in the right distribution mode (right distribution effect) is executed. Specifically, effect control device 300 rotates distribution member 1920 to convert the initial state (rear distribution state) to the right distribution state. As a result, the game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 and flown out of the outlet 1913 is guided to the ball rolling member 1940 and flows into the pseudo winning opening 1900a. That is, in this case, the right flow path (the guide flow path formed by the right outer extension wall 1953 and the right inner extension wall 1954) is selected as the flow path through which the game balls flowing into the out zone unit 1900 pass. ..

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 94( a ), when the currently set probability setting value is “5” or “6”, the distribution effect in the left distribution strong mode (left distribution strong effect ) Is executed. Specifically, effect control device 300 rotates distribution member 1920 to convert the initial state (rear distribution state) to the left distribution state. As a result, the game ball that entered the start winning opening 36 and flows out of the outlet 1913 is guided to the lower outlet 1912. The rotator 1930 rotates, for example, only when the left-side strong effect is produced, and does not rotate at other times. Therefore, the game ball guided to the lower outlet 1912 in the left distribution strong effect is the lower outlet 191.
When attracted to the magnet arrangement portion of the rotating body 1930 that rotates before flowing into 2, the body 19 is guided by the rotating body 1930 to the ball rolling member 1940 and flows into the pseudo winning opening 1900a. On the other hand, if the magnet is not attracted to the magnet arrangement portion of the rotating body 1930 that rotates before flowing into the lower outlet 1912, it flows into the lower outlet 1912. That is, in this case, as a flow path through which the game balls flowing into the out-zone unit 1900 pass, there is a flow path with left rotation (
The left flow path (the guide flow path formed by the left outer extending wall 1951 and the left inner extending wall 1952)+the rotating body 1930 is rotated) is selected.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 94A, when the currently set probability setting value is “1” or “2”, the distribution effect in the left distribution weak mode (left distribution weak distribution ) Is executed. Specifically, effect control device 300 rotates distribution member 1920 to convert the initial state (rear distribution state) to the left distribution state. As a result, the game ball that entered the start winning opening 36 and flows out of the outlet 1913 is guided to the lower outlet 1912. The rotating body 1930 faces a state in which the game ball guided to the lower outlet 1912 cannot be attracted to the magnet placement location while the rotation is stopped (for example, the magnet placement location is the upper side (the side opposite to the lower outlet 1912)). Maintained). Therefore, the game ball that is guided to the lower outlet 1912 in the left distribution weakness effect,
It does not stick to the magnet arrangement portion of the rotating body 1930, and flows into the lower outlet 1912. That is, in this case, as a flow path through which the game spheres flowing into the out zone unit 1900 pass, there is no left rotation flow path (left flow path (induction flow formed by the left outer extension wall 1951 and the left inner extension wall 1952). Road)+no rotation of rotator 1930) is selected.

Thereby, by executing the distribution effect, it is possible to suggest that the distribution effect approval/disapproval lottery has been won (that is, the jackpot expectation is higher than if the distribution effect approval/disapproval lottery was not won). At the same time, the currently set probability setting value can be suggested by the effect mode of the distribution effect.
The flow path selected as a flow path (hereinafter, referred to as “out-ball passing flow path”) through which the game balls that have flowed into the out zone unit 1900 differ depending on the effect mode of the distribution effect. Therefore, in the case of this modification, it can be said that the currently set probability setting value can be suggested by the selected out-sphere passage channel.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example uses the game ball that has won the winning area (for example, the starting winning opening 36) in the inflow area (out zone unit 1900), and the specific game (for example, is selected). A specific game mechanism (for example, a left flow path (a guide flow path formed by the left outer extension wall 1951 and the left inner extension wall 1952)) and a right flow path that perform a game of which out-ball passage flow path is which) (A guide flow path formed by the right outer extending wall 1953 and the right inner extending wall 1954), the distribution member 1920, and the rotating body 1930).

Therefore, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced while maintaining the fairness and fairness of the game.
Specifically, since the specific game (game ball effect) can be played in the inflow area (out zone unit 1900) such as the out area, the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, the specific game (game ball effect) is an effect that uses the game ball that has flowed into the inflow area (out zone unit 1900), and is not an effect that uses the game ball that may win the winning area. The fairness and fairness of the game can be maintained.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present modification can be configured to include notification means (production control device 300) that notifies predetermined information (for example, the probability setting value currently set) according to the result of the specific game.
The result of the specific game here is, for example, "the selected out-ball passage passage is the "left non-rotation passage"", "the selected out-sphere passage passage is the "right passage"". Yes, or "the selected out-ball passage passage is a "flow passage with left rotation"".
Therefore, a specific game (game ball effect) can be played in the inflow area (out zone unit 1900) such as an out area, and predetermined information can be notified according to the result of the specific game, which enhances the enjoyment of the game. be able to.
The inflow region is not limited to the outzone unit 1900 and can be changed as appropriate, and may be, for example, the outzone unit 800 or the outzone unit 900.
May be used, or the start winning unit 360 may be used.

Further, the selectivity of the flow path corresponding to the currently set probability setting value may not be 100%. That is, it is possible to select a flow path that does not correspond to the probability setting value so that the selection rate of the flow path that corresponds to the probability setting value is higher than the selection rate of the flow path that does not correspond to the probability setting value. ..
Specifically, for example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 94(a), the flow channel corresponding to the probability setting value "3" or "4" is the right flow channel, and the non-corresponding flow channel is the left non-rotation flow channel. In this case, not only the right-side flow channel but also the left-side non-rotation flow channel and the left-side rotation flow channel can be selected. It may be configured such that the selectivity of the right flow passage is higher than the selectivity of the above. In the case of such a configuration, the player sets the probability setting value currently set to “3” or “based on the tendency that the right channel is easily selected.
4” can be inferred. Other probability setting values can be similarly configured.
Therefore, even in the case of such a configuration, the currently set probability setting value can be suggested by the selected out-ball passage flow path (that is, the effect mode of the distribution effect).

Further, the information suggested by the selected out-ball passage flow path (that is, the information suggested by the production mode of the distribution effect) is not limited to the currently set probability setting value, and can be changed as appropriate.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 94(b), for example, the big hit history may be suggested by the selected out-ball passage passage. In the case of the example shown in FIG. 94(b), the player determines that the selected out-ball passage passage is the “left-side non-rotation passage” (or the “left-side non-rotation passage” is most easily selected). It can be inferred that the cumulative value of the number of jackpots is less than 15, and when the selected out-ball passage passage is the “right passage” (or “the right passage” is most easily selected). In this case, it can be estimated that the cumulative value of the number of jackpots is 15 times or more and less than 30 times, and the selected out-ball passage flow passage is the “flow passage with left rotation” (or “left rotation”). It can be inferred that the cumulative value of the big hits is 30 times or more in the case where the “existence channel” is most easily selected). Of course, the big hit history suggested by the selected out-ball passage passage is not limited to the cumulative value of the big hits (the total number of special game state occurrences from the predetermined time to the present time), and can be changed as appropriate, for example. It may be a cumulative value of the number of consecutive chans (the total value of the number of consecutive chans from a predetermined time to the present time).

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, the game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the special game state is generated when the result of the game is the special result. In a possible gaming machine, a plurality of flow paths through which game balls can pass (for example, a flow path without left rotation,
Selection means (direction) for selecting a flow passage through which a game ball passes from a plurality of flow passages based on right flow passage, flow passage with left rotation, and predetermined information (eg, probability setting value currently set) Control device 300) and switching means (switching member 1920) for switching the flow path according to the selection result of the selection means.
, Rotating body 1930).
Therefore, the predetermined information can be suggested by the flow path through which the game ball passes. That is, since an effect that suggests predetermined information can be performed as the effect using the game ball, it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect using the game ball.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example, a setting means capable of setting one probability set value among a plurality of probability set values to which the probability values used in the lottery of the game (special figure variation display game) are assigned ( The game control device 100) is provided, and the predetermined information can be configured to be the probability setting value set by the setting means (probability setting value currently set) (FIG. 94(a)).
)reference).
With such a configuration, as the effect using the game ball, since it is possible to perform an effect that suggests the probability set value (probability set value currently set) set by the setting means, the game ball is set. It is possible to enhance the interest of the production used.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example, the predetermined information can be configured to be history information regarding a special result (big hit history) (see FIG. 94(b)).
With this configuration, history information regarding special results (
Since it is possible to perform an effect that suggests a big hit history), it is possible to enhance the interest of the effect using a game ball.

The predetermined information is not limited to the probability setting value set by the setting means (probability setting value currently set) or history information (big hit history) regarding the special result. The predetermined information may be, for example, a base value or an accessory ratio. Here, the base value is a payout based on the number of game balls detected by the out switch that detects all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been shot in the game area 32 and finished playing, and the winning in the prize area. A value calculated from the number, the information necessary for displaying the base value includes, for example, information about the number of game balls detected by the out switch and information about the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. .. In addition, the ratio of the accessory character is in the big hit state (that is, fanfare and ending) of the total number of award balls (total number of award balls) obtained by winning the prize hole from turning on the game machine 10 to the present. It is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired by each character) obtained by winning the special winning opening in (excluding the inside) (so-called continuous character ratio), and the information necessary to display the character ratio. Includes, for example, information about the total number of prize balls (the total number of prize balls) and information about the number of prize balls (the number of acquired balls for each character).

Further, for example, below the normal symbol starting gate 34, a plurality of guide flow paths capable of guiding the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 (or the general winning opening 35), a constantly rotating sorting member, and a game. Switching means (for example, a guide valve) for switching the guide passage through which the sphere passes among the plurality of guide passages
May be provided, and the guide flow path may be switched according to predetermined information (for example, the probability setting value currently set). Specifically, for example, in the plurality of guide flow paths, an advantageous guide flow path in which the game balls are easily guided to the start winning opening 36 (or the general winning opening 35) and the game balls are started winning opening 36 (or There is a disadvantageous guiding channel that is difficult to guide to the general winning hole 35),
The switching means is an opening/closing member that opens and closes the inlet of each of the plurality of guide channels provided, and the game sphere that has normally passed through the symbol starting gate 34 is directed to the plurality of guide channel sides by the distribution member. Of the plurality of guiding channels, the guiding channel having an open inlet (that is, the guiding channel selected based on the predetermined information) is introduced.
When configured in this way, for example, the higher the probability value corresponding to the currently set probability setting value, the higher the probability that an advantageous guide passage is selected as the guide passage through which the game ball passes. May be. Further, in the case of such a configuration, the control of the switching means is performed by the effect control device 30.
Instead of 0, the game control device 100 may perform. Further, in the case of such a configuration, the switching means may be operated (switching operation) when the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting gate 34.

Further, for example, on the stage portion 32S, a plurality of guide flow paths capable of guiding the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 (or the general prize opening 35) and a guide flow path through which the game ball passes, the plurality of guide flow paths. A switching means (for example, a guiding valve) for switching in the path may be provided to switch the guiding flow path in accordance with predetermined information (for example, the currently set probability setting value).
When configured in this way, for example, the higher the probability value corresponding to the currently set probability setting value, the higher the probability that an advantageous guide passage is selected as the guide passage through which the game ball passes. May be. Further, in the case of such a configuration, the control of the switching means is performed by the effect control device 30.
Instead of 0, the game control device 100 may perform.

Further, for example, in the special winning opening, a plurality of guide flow paths capable of guiding the game ball to a specific area (for example, V area) and a guide flow path through which the game ball passes are switched among the plurality of guide flow paths. A switching means (for example, a guiding valve) may be provided to switch the guiding flow path in accordance with predetermined information (for example, the currently set probability setting value).
When configured in this way, for example, the higher the probability value corresponding to the currently set probability setting value, the higher the probability that an advantageous guide passage is selected as the guide passage through which the game ball passes. May be. Further, in the case of such a configuration, the control of the switching means is performed by the effect control device 30.
Instead of 0, the game control device 100 may perform.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example, the variable display game (special figure variable display game) is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the special game state is executed when the result of the variable display game is a special result. Specific game execution means for executing a specific game different from the variable display game (for example, a game of which out-ball passage passage is selected)
Production control device 300), a setting means (game control device 100) capable of setting one probability setting value from a plurality of probability setting values to which the probability values used for the lottery of the variable display game are assigned,
According to the result mode of the specific game, the probability setting value set by the setting means (probability setting value currently set) can be suggested. Specifically, in the case of the present modification, the result mode of the specific game is that the selected out-sphere passage passage is the "left-side non-rotation passage", "
Either the selected out-ball passage passage is the "right-side passage" or "the selected out-sphere passage passage is the "rotation passage on the left side"".
Therefore, since a specific game capable of suggesting the currently set probability setting value can be played as a game different from the variable display game, the interest of the game different from the variable display game can be increased.
The information that can be suggested by a game different from the variable display game is not limited to the currently set probability setting value and can be changed as appropriate, and may be, for example, a jackpot history.

<Modified example of specific game>
The specific game different from the variable display game is not limited to the game played in the out-zone unit (for example, the game in which the selected out-ball passage flow path is), and can be appropriately changed. Specifically, the specific game that is different from the variable display game may be, for example, a game that is executed at the opportunity of a pseudo winning.
Examples of the game executed with the pseudo prize as a trigger include roulette effect.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 95(a), when a game ball flows into the pseudo winning opening 1900a (or the pseudo winning opening 870 or the pseudo winning opening 900a), a plurality of character images are displayed. A roulette effect in which the included roulette image rotates and the roulette image stops at a predetermined timing may be executed.
At that time, as shown in FIG. 95B, for example, the currently set probability setting value may be suggested according to the result mode of the roulette effect. In the case of the example shown in FIG. 95(b),
When the first character stops at the position of the arrow (or when the first character most easily stops at the position of the arrow), the player sets the probability setting value currently set to "1" or "
2” and the second character stops at the position of the arrow (or the second character most easily stops at the position of the arrow), the probability setting value currently set. Is "3" or "4", and if the third character stops at the position of the arrow (or if the third character is most likely to stop at the position of the arrow), the current setting It can be inferred that the set probability value is “5” or “6”. For example, in the roulette effect shown in FIG. 95(a), since the second character is stopped at the position of the arrow as a result mode of the roulette effect, the currently set probability setting value is "3".
Or it is suggesting that it is "4".

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present modified example, the variable display game (special figure variable display game) is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the variable display game is the special result, the special result is displayed. In a gaming machine capable of generating a game state, a specific game execution means (production control device 300) for executing a specific game (for example, roulette effect) different from the variable display game, and a probability value used for lottery of the variable display game are assigned. And a setting means (game control device 100) capable of setting one probability setting value from among the plurality of probability setting values set, and the probability setting value set by the setting means depending on the result mode of the specific game ( The probability setting value currently set) can be suggested. Specifically, in the case of this modified example, the result mode of the specific game is one of "stop with the first character", "stop with the second character", and "stop with the third character".
Therefore, it is possible to perform a specific game that can suggest the currently set probability setting value as a game different from the variable display game (a game triggered by a pseudo winning). Can be increased.

The information that can be suggested by a game different from the variable display game (a game triggered by a pseudo winning) is not limited to the probability setting value that is currently set, and can be changed as appropriate, such as a jackpot history or a predetermined expectation. It may be a degree (a big hit expectation degree, a reach occurrence expectation degree, etc.).
Further, the specific game different from the variable display game (the game triggered by the pseudo winning) is not limited to the roulette effect, but can be changed appropriately.
Further, triggered by the pseudo winning, the expectation degree suggesting image G2 shown in, for example, FIGS. 51(a) and 51(d),
That is, a specific image (for example, a character image “?” or a character image “!”) may be displayed.

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and other gaming machines such as other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines using the game balls. Further, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, but includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines that use game balls. Further, the configurations of the above-described modified examples can be appropriately combined and applied.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplifications in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.
For example, in Modification B and Modification C described above, the main display device (segment display) 41
Although the decorative special figure variable display game is executed in "a" and the effect or the like is executed in the sub display device 41b, the reverse may be executed. Further, the main display device 41a may be a display device (a liquid crystal display device or the like) similar to the sub display device 41b.

10 Gaming Machine 30 Gaming Board 32 Gaming Area 32L Left Downflow Area (Predetermined Gaming Ball Downflow Area)
32R Right side downflow area (predetermined game ball downflow area)
32W warp flow path (predetermined game ball downflow area)
41 display device (display means)
41L Left overlap area (overlap area)
41R Right overlap area (overlap area)
41W Warp overlap area (overlap area)
100 game control device (setting means)
300 Effect control device (game execution means, suggestion effect execution means, selection means, specific game execution means)
1920 Sorting member (switching means)
1930 Rotating body (switching means)
G2 Expectation suggestive image

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state when a variable display game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the variable display game is a special result,
Specific game executing means for executing a specific game different from the variable display game,
A setting means capable of setting one probability setting value from a plurality of probability setting values to which a probability value used for the lottery of the variable display game is assigned;
A game machine characterized in that the probability setting value set by the setting means can be suggested according to the result mode of the specific game.

Images